Skip to main content

Full text of "Glimpses of great fields"

See other formats


NYPLI 


|3':]433  06823864  5 


GRGHT    FICLDS 


I 


t  r  ed  ex  .\.  .o  k Z)...a.uri..cl.e  .r..s.., t  .^..a .. 


(  J4;^ 

ZEX 


]UN  13  1900 


(  >4^., 


GLIMPSES 
OF    GREAT     FIELDS 


BY 

REV.  J.  A.  HALL,  A.  M. 


"  This  I  dare  affirm  in  knowledge  of  nature,  that  a  little  natural  philosophy,  and 
the  first  entrance  into  u,  doth  dispose  the  opinion  to  atheism  ;  but  on  the  other 
side,  much  natural  philosophy,  and  wading  deep  into  it,  will  bring  about  men's 
minds  to  religion."  —  Bacon. 


BOSTON 

D     LOTHROP   COMPANY 

FRANKLIN    AND    HAWLEY    STREETS 


YOR^ 


Copyright,  1888 

BY 

D.  LoTHROP  Company. 


PREFACE. 

"  Canst  thou  by  searching  find  out  God  ?  "  "  If  a 
man  die,  shall  he  live  again  ?  "  These  were  the  questions 
that  already  concerned  the  Chaldean  seer,  and  that  ever 
since  have  been  uppermost  in  the  minds  of  thinking 
men.  They  are  the  questions  that  every  philosophy 
and  every  religion  has  attempted  in  some  way  to 
answer.  The  answer  that  on  the  part  of  Christian 
thinkers  has  from  time  to  time  been  given  to  the  first 
of  these  questions  has  been  determined  by  the  under- 
standing that  has  been  had  of  its  meaning.  Those 
who  have  understood  Job  to  be  speaking  of  a  compre- 
hensive knowledge  of  God,  have  answered  his  question 
in  the  negative.  In  this  sense  it  is  felt  that  God  can- 
not be  found  out  by  searching.  But  those  who  have 
understood  Job  as  speaking  not  of  a  knowledge  com- 
prehensive but  apprehensive,  have  usually  answered 
his  question  in  the  affirmative.  It  is  now  conceded  that 
God  may  be  apprehended,  that  is,  that  his  existence 
as  the  result  of  searching  may  be  affirmed.  This  was 
the  opinion  of  the  great  Schelling.  He  expressed  it  as 
his  belief,  "  that  a  thoroughly  rational  perception  of 
the  existence   of  a  personal  being  as  the  author  and 


PREFACE. 

ruler  of  the  world,  would  be  the  ultimate  fruit  of  a 
thorough  and  comprehensive  speculation."  In  the 
opinion  of  the  author  of  this  book  this  projDhecy  of 
Schelling's  has  already  been  fulfilled.  In  his  humble 
judgment  the  time  has  already  come  ^vhen  the  Chris- 
tian idea  of  God  may  be  said  to  have  been  intellectually 
apprehended  by  the  thinking  mind  not  only  in  the 
Church,  but  also  in  the  philosophical  world.  A  few  of 
the  reasons  upon  which  he  bases  his  judgment  are 
given  in  the  following  chapters. 


CONTENTS. 

Page. 

FORCE 9 

MIND 57 

LIFE 107 

THE  BRAIN 149 

THE  SPIRITUAL  BODY 191 


FORCE. 

"I  deem  it  just  as  absurd  and  illogical,  to  affirm  that  there  is 
no  place  for  a  God  in  nature,  originating  and  controlling  its  forces 
by  his  will,  as  it  would  be  to  assert  that  there  is  no  place  in  man's 
body  for  his  conscious  mind."  —  Dr.  W.  B.  Carpenter. 

"  The  convertibility  of  the  physical  forces,  the  correlation  of 
these  with  the  vital,  and  the  intimacy  of  that  nexus  between  mental 
and  bodily  activity,  which,  explain  it  as  we  may,  cannot  be  denied, 
all  lead  upward  towards  one  and  the  same  conclusion,  the  source 
of  all  power  in  mind ;  and  that  philosophical  conclusion  is  the 
apex  of  a  pyramid,  which  has  it  foundation  in  the  primitive  in- 
stincts of  humanity." — Dr.  W.  B.  Carpenter,  "Mental  Physi- 
ology," chap.  XX ;  p.  696. 


GLIMPSES  OF  GREAT  FIELDS 


FORCE. 

For  He  spake  and  it  was  done,  He  commanded 
and  it  stood  fast.  —  Psalm  xxxiii.  9. 

In  the  early  history  of  Science,  the  attention 
of  men  was  mainly  directed  to  matter.  Whence 
comes  matter  ?  What  are  its  laws  ?  What  is 
matter  in  itself .?  These  are  the  questions  with 
which  men  of  science  were  long  concerned. 

The  past  century,  however,  has  been  character- 
ized by  the  intensity  of  its  efforts  to  solve  two 
other  problems,  namely,  What  is  force.'*  What  are 
its  laws  ? 

In  the  thorough  study  of  matter  it  was  found 
that  little  could  be  known  as  to  its  nature.  It 
was  found  that  some  of  its  laws  could  be  deter- 
mined, but  that  matter  itself  could  not  be  defined. 
But  while  the  study  of  matter,  so  far  as  enabling 

9 


10  .  FORCE. 

the  investigator  to  affirm  what  it  was,  was  con- 
cerned, proved  unavailing",  it  was  not  without  its 
profit ;  for  the  inquiry  of  the  present  times  in 
regard  to  force,  has  but  sprung  out  of  the  inquiry 
of  the  past  in  regard  to  matter.  The  study  of 
matter  revealed  the  truth  that  nothing  could  be 
known  of  it  except  through  its  manifestations  of 
forces  ;  and  thus  out  of  the  fruitlessness  of  invesj 
tigation  in  one  direction,  has  come  the  more  fruit- 
ful research  in  another. 

But  now,  when  we  consider  the  universal  preva- 
lence of  force  in  our  world,  as  well  as  the  functions 
which  it  performs,  it  seems  strange  that  its  suc- 
cessful investigation,  as  well  as  the  formulating  of 
its  laws,  should  have  been  deferred  until  now ;  and 
yet  the  progress  which  has  of  late  been  made  in 
this  most  interesting  department  of  our  knowl- 
edge, may  at  least  in  some  measure  atone  for  the 
years  of  former  ignorance. 

The  task  which  we  have  assigned  for  ourselves 
in  the  present  lecture,  is,  to  make  ourselves  ac- 
quainted as  far  as  possible  with  this  invisible 
something  which  we  call  "force."  The  first  thing 
in  our  study  of  nature  with  which  we  are 
impressed    is,   the    universal    prevalence  of    force. 


FORCE.  1 1 

Here  we  find  it  manifesting  its  presence  in 
heat,  there  in  light.  Here  in  electricity,  there 
in  chemical  affinity.  Here  in  magnetism,  and 
there  again  in  motion ;  for  we  must  not  for- 
get that  these  various  terms,  heat,  magnetism, 
light,  and  so  forth,  which  we  use  when  speak- 
ing of  these  various  phenomena,  are,  after  all, 
but  different  names  for  the  one  thing  called  force, 
and  are  simply  meant  to  describe  the  different 
modes  of  its  manifestation.  Indeed  here  in  the 
present  universe  force  is  more  universally  present 
even  than  matter.  Unrest  everywhere  implies  the 
presence  of  force,  and  there  is  nothing  at  abso- 
lute rest.  The  rocks  that  sleep  on  the  mountain- 
side are  not  at  rest.  So  far  as  appearance  goes 
they  may  not  have  changed  position  ;  they  may 
seem  to  have  rested  in  the  same  position  which 
they  now  occupy  since  the  morning  of  creation, 
and  yet  throughout  their  structure  there  has  not 
been  a  moment  when  there  has  ceased  to  be  move- 
ment. 

Heated  under  the  sun,  or  cooled  by  the  passing 
cloud,  every  change  in  temperature  has  produced  a 
molecular  change  throughout  their  whole  structure. 
Slow  chemical  or  electrical  actions,  even  light,  or 


12  FORCE. 

some  invisible  radiant  forces  are  ever  at  work,  in 
some  way  affecting  them ;  so  that  at  no  moment  can 
they  be  said  to  be  at  absolute  rest.  In  the  ocean 
stretching  itself  in  the  sunlight  and  unruffled  by 
the  faintest  breeze,  mighty  forces  are  at  work.  In 
the  ether,  here  in  the  atom,  or  there  in  the  far- 
away nebular  spaces,  forming  a  world,  force  is  at 
work,  in  one  or  another  of  its  numerous  forms  ; 
but  when  we  consider  force  in  its  relation  to  our- 
selves, in  every  function  of  life,  it  assumes  a  new 
interest. 

It  is  not  until  we  ask  ourselves  what  we  might 
do  and  be  if  force  were  not,  that  our  real  depen- 
dence on  it,  as  well  as  the  integral  part  that  it 
really  plays,  begin  to  appear. 

Take,  for  instance,  the  force  locked  up  in  the 
sunbeam.  Never  was  an  unweaned  child  more 
dependent  on  its  mother  than  are  we  on  the  sun. 
We  need  heat,  we  need  water,  we  need  food  and 
clothing.  For  our  highest  happiness,  commerce 
and  the  various  industries  must  be.  But  the  power 
that  makes  all  these  possible  is  to  be  traced  to  the 
sunbeam. 

Coming  down  through  the  ether  it  strikes  some- 
where the  earth  ;  let  us  say  that  it  falls  on  an  ex- 


FORCE.  13 

panded  sheet  of  water,  on  a  pond,  a  lake,  or  the 
ocean.  Here  its  force,  in  the  form  of  heat,  changes 
the  particles  of  water  nearest  the  surface  into 
steam;  and  then,  lifting  these  steam  atoms  aloft 
into  the  atmosphere,  bears  them  away  in  the  lap 
of  the  storm,  perhaps  beyond  the  tropics  or  the 
Arctic  Circle.  By  and  by  these  particles,  having 
been  condensed,  fall  in  rain.  Rushing  down  the 
hillsides  in  torrents  they  fill  the  channels  of  the 
river  that  carries  our  commerce  to  the  sea.  Here, 
driven  by  the  force  of  the  sun,  transformed  now 
into  wind,  this  commerce  is  carried  abroad  to 
other  nations  of  the  earth,  and  the  ships  again 
return,  laden  with  the  products  of  other  shores. 

And  thus  you  see,  when  we  begin  to  trace  the 
force  of  a  single  sunbeam,  how  wide  our  field  is, 
and  how  numerous  the  modes  are  that  force  may 
assume.  Nor  is  this  all.  No  sooner  has  our  river 
reached  the  sea,  bearing  on  its  bosom  the  products 
of  the  soil,  than  it  is  again  pumped  up  by  the 
force  of  the  sun,  falls  again  in  rain,  and  the  force 
expended  in  lifting  is  now  transformed  into  the 
kinetic  force  of  the  river,  which  as  it  moves  on 
again  to  the  sea  turns  the  mills  and  the  facto- 
ries that  grind  the  meal  for  our  bread,  and  spin  the 


14  FORCE. 

fabric  for  our  garments.  All  this  does  the  force 
of  the  sunbeam  do  for  us,  as  falling  quietly,  and, 
as  we  perhaps  thought,  without  effect,  on  the 
water.  But  suppose  now  that  our  ray,  instead  of 
falling  on  the  pond,  or  lake,  falls  on  the  land ;  its 
effects  would  not  be  less  marked.  Here  it  would 
produce  vegetation  and  set  in  operation  all  those 
hidden  springs  of  life,  which,  manifested  in  forms 
of  beauty  or  of  use,  make  it  possible  for  us  to  live. 
And  so,  were  we  to  trace  the  matter  still  further, 
it  would  be  easy  to  show  that  there  is  not  a  func- 
tion in  your  life  or  mine,  not  a  portion  of  the 
organic  world  around  us,  not  an  atom  or  a  world 
in  the  universe,  with  which  force  has  not  some- 
thing to  do,  and  in  the  building  up  and  condition- 
ing of  which  it  is  not  a  prominent  factor. 

But  we  have  now  gone  far  enough  to  ask  the 
question,  What  is  force }  What  is  this  invisible, 
intangible  something  which  now  here,  now  there, 
is  constantly  solving  for  us  the  problems  of  exist- 
ence }     What  can  we  know  about  it } 

It  is  characteristic  of  the  thinking  mind  that  it 
cannot  be  satisfied  by  a  study  of  phenomena  sim- 
ply. For  a  time  it  may  interest  itself  in  mere 
appearance,   in  the  observance  of  variety  in   plie- 


FORCE.  15 

nomena ;  but  by  and  by  it  ceases  to  be  satisfied 
with  this,  and  seeks  to  know  what  that  may  be 
that  hes  back  of  appearance,  the  something  that 
is  the  cause  and  condition  of  appearance.  Thus 
it  was  that  for  a  time  men  were  satisfied  to  res^ard 
force  simply  on  the  side  of  its  manifestation  or 
appearance.  They  scrutinized  a  body  as  it  fell  to 
the  earth,  and  studied  out  the  laws  of  its  descent. 
They  watched  the  flight  of  projectiles  ;  measured 
their  momentum.  They  watched  the  planets  as 
they  sped  on  in  their  nightly  orbits,  watched  care- 
fully their  behavior,  and  formulated  the  laws 
governing  the  heavenly  worlds.  To-day,  however, 
men  are  pushing  their  investigations  further  ;  they 
are  getting  more  nearly  than  hitherto  into  the  holy 
of  holies  of  nature,  and  are  studiously  endeavoring 
to  know  force  in  its  essence.  They  ask,  What  is 
this  unseen,  imponderable,  immaterial  something, 
this  ever-present  factor  called  force  ?  No  question 
has  been  of  greater  interest,  nor  is  it  strange 
that  it  should  be  more  easily  asked  than  answered. 
As  long  as  force  was  regarded  merely  as  motion, 
or  resistance,  it  was  easy  to  define  it.  Then  it 
was  sufficient  to  say  that  force  was  the  power  that 
produced  motion  or  resistance.     But  unfortunately 


1 6  FORCE. 

for  that  definition,  it  has  been  found  that  motion 
is  only  one  out  of  many  modes  of  force  ;  that  heat, 
Hght,  electricity,  attraction,  chemical  affinity  and 
the  like,  are  also  forces  just  as  truly  as  is  motion. 
It  was  found,  also,  that  force  had  that  which  re- 
lated it  more  nearly  to  the  realm  of  mind  than  to 
that  of  matter,  and  that  in  order  to  explain  many 
of  its  operations,  an  intelligence  somewhere  had 
to  be  supposed.  And  thus,  as  men  attained  a 
truer  conception  of  force,  it  was  found  that  the 
definition  that  made  it  simply  the  power  to  pro- 
duce, or  to  retard  motion,  was  too  narrow,  and 
that  that  definition  did  not  define  force  at  all,  but 
only  motion,  which  is  but  one  of  the  modes  of 
force.  Nor  does  the  more  recent  definition,  that 
makes  force  a  push,  pull,  or  weight,  as  the  case 
may  be,  seem  to  be  more  satisfactory.  For  while 
these  may  be  the  measures  of  forces  operating  in 
certain  ways,  it  is  clear  that  neither  of  these  defi- 
nitions define  force;  for  force  is  manifestly  that 
which  lies  back  of  the  push,  back  of  the  pull ;  the 
thing  that  causes  the  weight  or  pressure.  Between 
force,  and  the  effects  or  manifestations  of  force, 
there  must  be  a  wide  distinction.  *'  They  differ, 
in  fact,  in   precisely  the   same  way  as   length   or 


FORCE.  17 

breadth  differs  from  superficial  area.  And  this 
modern  abuse  of  the  word  is  no  more  outrageous 
alike  to  science  and  common  sense  than  would  be 
the  attempt  to  assign  the  height  of  a  mountain  in 
acres."*  Indeed,  it  has  come  to  be  admitted  as 
strongly  probable  that  there  is  no  such  thing  as 
force  as  it  is  ordinarily  conceived,  any  more  than 
there  is  such  a  thing  as  sound  or  light ;  and  yet 
we  must  retain  the  term  as  designating  certain 
phenomena  which  are  constantly  appearing,  just 
as  we  must  retain  the  terms  ''sound"  and  "light," 
though  it  is  clear  that  they  have  no  existence  as 
things. 

But  now  when  we  have  come  to  regard  force  no 
longer  as  a  thing,  that  is,  in  the  sense  in  which 
matter  or  substance  is  a  thing,  we  have  gone  a 
great  way  in  coming  to  a  true  conception  of  what 
force  is  in  itself ;  and  if  we  have  accomplished  no 
more  by  this  advanced  step,  we  have  at  least  rele- 
gated force  from  the  realm  of  the  seen  to  that  of 
the  unseen,  and  have  come  by  that  much  nearer 
to  determining  its  origin. 

And  here  we  may  venture  on  a  definition  of 
force,  which    must  stand  or  fall,  according  as  to 

*  Unseen  Universe,     p.  104. 


1 8  FORCE. 

whether  it  describes  and  explains  the  thing  defined. 
A  true  definition  must  always  be  a  description 
which  manifests  as  far  as  possible  the  nature  of 
the  thing  defined ;  it  must  add  to  our  knowledge 
of  the  thing  itself.  Of  every  scientific  definition 
we  may  demand  that  it  give  us  some  insight,  not 
alone  into  the  method,  but  that  it  also  set  before 
the  mind  the  idea  according  to  which  we  may 
interpret  not  one,  but  all  the  phenomena  of  a 
class. 

Conforming,  then,  to  these  requirements,  what 
now  is  force  }  Our  answer  is  :  Farce  is  voluntary 
energy,  directly  or  indirectly  applied.  As  now 
existing  in  the  universe,  it  is  voluntary  energy 
indirectly  operative.  But  as  to  its  origin,  in  time 
all  forces  must  be  traced  to  voluntary  energy, 
emanating  from  a  personal  will. 

Let  us  now  give  ourselves  to  the  task  of  deter- 
mining how  far  our  definition  will  go  in  explaining 
the  facts,  and  whether,  in  its  application  to  the 
laws  of  force  as  already  worked  out,  it  will  stand. 

The  scientific  history"  of  the  last  century  was 
marked  by  the  discovery  of  two  great  principles, 
known  as  the  ''correlation  "  and  **  conservation  " 
of   forces.      In  the  little  town  of  Wol)urn,  Mass., 


FORCE.  19 

in  the  year  1753,  was  born  Benjamin  Thomp- 
son, afterwards  known  as  "  Count  Rumford." 
One  day,  in  the  discharge  of  his  duties  in  the 
Munich  arsenal,  he  observed  the  large  amount 
of  heat  generated  in  the  boring  of  a  brass  cannon. 
At  once  he  proposed  to  himself  the  question, 
"Whence  comes  this  heat  produced  in  this  me- 
chanical operation  ?  "  In  order  to  solve  the  prob- 
lem he  entered  on  a  long  series  of  experiments. 
Repeating  the  operation  of  the  Munich  arsenal, 
he  constructed  a  steel  borer,  and  with  this  he 
operated  on  a  brass  cylinder.  Fixing  the  borer 
into  its  position  and  forcing  it  down  tightly  against 
the  cylinder,  which  was  made  to  revolve  by  horse 
power,  he  soon  observed  the  change  in  tempera- 
ture which  had  before  attracted  his  attention. 
The  variation  of  temperature  was  registered  by  a 
thermometer.  With  this  contrivance  he  found 
that  in  the  space  of  thirty  minutes  the  tempera- 
ture of  the  cylinder  was  raised  from  sixty  degrees 
to  one  hundred  and  thirty  degrees  Fahrenheit.  But 
now,  what  brought  about  this  change  in  the  tem- 
perature of  the  metal  under  the  friction  of  the 
brass  with  the  steel  auger }  It  was  clear  that 
there  was  a  relation  between  the   friction  and  the 


20  FORCE. 

amount  of  heat,  but  what  was  that  relation,  and 
how  was  it  to  be  explained  ?  It  did  not  take  Mr. 
Thompson  long  to  perceive  that  the  heat  came 
out  of,  or  rather  was  but  a  transformation  of,  the 
energy  expended  by  the  horse.  In  producing  the 
revolution  of  the  cylinder,  force  was  expended  by 
the  horse.  When  the  force  expended  was  greater, 
as  was  the  case  when  the  friction  was  increased 
by  bringing  the  metals  into  closer  contact,  it  was 
found  that  the  heat  generated  was  greater,  and 
vice  versa.  Guided  in  the  proper  direction  by 
these  experiments,  Rumford  was  soon  led  to  see 
that  in  the  case  before  him  force  was  changed 
into  heat  ;  that  the  energy  expended  by  the  horse 
was  not  lost,  as  had  been  supposed,  but  that  it 
had  all  been  conserved,  and  was  now  stored  up 
in  the  form  of  heat  in  the  brass  cylinder.  By 
further  experiments  it  was  easily  shown  that 
this  heat  could  be  again  changed  back  into  dy- 
namic or  motive  force  ;  and  though  Rumford  did 
not  know  the  mighty  bearing  of  his  discovery,  yet 
to  him  belongs  the  honor  of  first  establishing  a 
principle  which  has  since,  in  a  large  measure,  rev- 
olutionized the  world  of  scientific  thought.  From 
that  day  to  ours  the  advance  has  been  prodigious. 


FORCE.  21 

The  principle  discovered  by  Rumford,  and 
worked  out  to  its  present  perfection  by  such  men 
as  Joule,  Grove,  Mayer,  Faraday,  Helmholtz  and 
Liebig  has  now  become  an  established  dogma  of 
science  known  as  the  principle  of  "the  correla- 
tion and  conservation  of  forces." 

At  this  point  it  is  important  that  we  should 
understand  precisely  what  is  meant  by  the  phrase 
*' correlation  and  conservation,"  as  well  as  observe 
in  how  far  these  principles  may  lay  claim  to  the 
dignity  of  scientific  laws.  By  the  term  "conserva- 
tion "  is  meant,  in  simple  language,  this  :  the  inde- 
structability  of  any  force.  We  mean  by  it  that  no 
force  is  annihilated  ;  that  when  it  is,  as  we  say, 
expended,  it  has  not  ceased  to  be ;  not  gone  out  of 
existence,  but  remains  as  a  factor  in  the  universe, 
though  it  may  exist  in  altogether  another  form. 

As  no  atom  of  matter  can  be  destroyed,  so 
neither  can  any  particle  of  force.  Now,  it  was 
long  before  this  fact  was  recognized  ;  it  was 
supposed  that  when  a  force  was  expended,  as  we 
call  it,  that  it  ceased  from  thenceforth  to  be,  and 
that  if  its  place  was  ever  again  to  be  filled,  it  must 
be  by  the  creation  of  some  new  force. 

When,  for   instance,  a   projectile   shot   from   a 


22  FORCE. 

cannon  fell  to  the  earth  under  the  law  of  gravity, 
or  encountered  resistance  that  destroyed  its  mo- 
tion, it  was  supposed  that  the  force  which  it  rep- 
resented was  forever  lost.  That  when  the  arrow 
had  reached  its  goal  the  force  that  had  propelled 
it  in  its  flight  was  annihilated.  It  took  a  long 
time  to  understand  that  if  this  were  true,  some 
hidden  laboratory  in  which  force  is  manufactured 
must  be  kept  constantly  in  operation  to  supply 
the  place  of  that  which  is  being  constantly  ex- 
pended. But  by  and  by,  however,  it  came  to  be 
asked  what  becomes  of  these  forces  when  they 
are,  as  we  say,  expended }  And  may  it  not  indeed 
be  that  they  are  in  some  way  conserved  —  stored 
up,  perhaps,  in  some  other  form  ?  Might  it  not 
be  that  the  heat  produced  by  the  contact  of  the 
cannon  ball  with  the  resisting  medium,  and  the 
heat  of  the  anvil  under  the  repeated  strokes  of 
the  blacksmith's  hammer  be  but  expended  force, 
though  now  in  another  form.!*  Might  it  not  be 
that  the  disturbance  of  the  ether  particles,  as  the 
projectile  shot  through  them,  is  but  carried  to 
other  entities,  and  from  them  again  to  still  others, 
so  that  no  force  is  really  lost } 

Well,    these    questions    are    now    satisfactorily 


FORCE.  23 

settled.  No  doctrine  of  science  is  more  clearly 
established  than  that  force,  once  in  existence,  is 
never  annihilated.  But  when  this  was  established, 
the  other  principle,  namely,  that  of  correlation,  was 
also  fixed.  It  was  found  that  no  body  could  be 
heated  without  some  other  body  being  correspond- 
ingly cooled ;  that  one  mode  of  force  could  not  be 
produced  without  exhausting  another  in  an  equiva- 
lent ratio.  To  this  principle  was  applied  the  term 
correlation,  and  by  it  was  meant,  that  when  a 
force  existed  in  one  mode,  it  ceased  to  exist  in  the 
mode  immediately  preceding,  and  that  the  second 
mode  was  generated  at  the  expense  of  the  first, 
the  third  at  the  expense  of  the  second,  and  so  on. 
But,  after  all,  the  terms  correlation  and  conser- 
vation express  facts  that  are  much  the  same  ;  for 
experience  proves  that  if  forces  are  conserved 
they  must  also  be  correlated,  and  if  correlated 
they  must  also  be  conserved.  Perhaps  it  would 
be  better  to  say  that  the  one  expression  states  or 
refers  to  the  fact,  and  the  other  to  the  method. 
And  now  let  us  go  out  into  nature,  and  see 
whether  we  can  prove  our  principles  of  correla- 
tion and  conservation  to  be  true. 

In  speaking  of    force  in  relation  to  its    power 


24  FORCE. 

to  do  work,  it  has  become  necessary  to  use  two 
terms  :  kinetic  and  potential.  A  ball,  for  instance, 
projected  from  a  piece  of  ordnance  is  capable,  as 
we  say,  of  performing  execution.  By  that  we  mean 
that  its  energy  is  operative  energy,  or  the  energy 
of  motion  ;  and  its  power  to  accomplish  work  is 
measured  as  half  the  product  of  the  moving  mass 
into  the  square  of  the  velocity.  Force  as  thus 
measured  is  called  kinetic  energy.  But  there  is 
another  kind  of  energy  which  has  also  power  to 
do  work  if  allowed  to.  This  is  called,  by  way  of 
distinction,  potential  energy.  It  is  the  energy 
that  the  rock  possesses  when  it  rests  in  an  ele- 
vated position  ;  for,  to  demonstrate  the  presence 
of  force  in  this  case,  you  have  only  to  remove 
whatever  obstruction  there  my  be  —  let  it  fall  to 
the  earth  —  and  its  latent  force  is  at  once  given 
out.  But  now  observe  not  alone  how  energy  is 
conserved,  but  also  how  one  kind  of  energy  is 
capable  of  being  transformed  into  another,  or,  as 
it  is  called,  conserved. 

Take  the  illustration  given  by  Stuart  and  Tait. 
A  cannon  ball  is  fired  upward  into  the  air.  Against 
the  force  of  gravity,  such  a  ball,  as  it  mounts,  will 
each  moment  lose  a   ])ortion    of  its  velocity,  until 


FORCE.  25 

it  finally  comes  to  a  standstill ;  after  which  it  will 
begin  to  descend.  When  it  is  just  turning  it  is 
perfectly  harmless.  ''And  if  we  were  stationed 
on  the  top  of  the  cliff  to  which  it  had  just  reached, 
we  might,  without  danger,  catch  it  in  our  arms 
and  lodge  it  on  the  cliff.  Its  energy  has  appar- 
ently disappeared.  Let  us,  however,  see  whether 
this  is  really  true  or  not. 

"  It  was  fired  up  at  us,  let  us  say,  by  a  foe  at 
the  bottom  of  the  cliff,  and  the  thought  occurs  to 
us  to  drop  it  down  upon  him  again,  which  we  do 
with  success,  for  he  is  smashed  to  pieces  by  the 
ball.  In  truth,  dynamics  informs  us  that  such  a 
ball  will  strike  the  ground  with  a  velocity,  and 
therefore  with  an  energy,  precisely  equal  to  that 
with  which  it  was  originally  projected  upward. 
So  likewise  a  pond  of  water,  unless  it  has  a  fall,  is 
of  no  use  in  driving  a  water-wheel.  The  head  or 
the  power  of  descending,  gives  it  a  store  of  dor- 
mant energy,  which  becomes  active  as  the  water 
descends." 

Now  observe  here  the  operation  of  our  princi- 
ples of  correlation  and  conservation.  It  would  at 
first  thought  have  been  supposed  that  when  the 
cannon  ball  had  reached  the  top  of  the  cliff,  its 


26  FORCE. 

energy  was  lost,  annihilated  ;  but  not  so.  The 
energy  expended  in  projecting  it  upward  is  stored 
up,  or  rather  changed  into  potential  energy ;  and 
all  that  you  need  to  do  to  call  it  out  again,  is  sim- 
ply to  drop  it,  and  by  the  time  it  reaches  the  earth 
its  force  is  the  same  practically  that  it  was  the 
moment  it  left  the  mouth  of  the  cannon.  So  with 
the  water  of  the  pond  on  the  hillside.  It  would 
appear  that  the  force  expended  by  the  sun  in  lift- 
ing its  water  to  this  elevated  position  when  it  was 
taken  up  in  the  form  of  vapor,  was  lost.  But 
liberate  the  water ;  let  it  rush  down  the  hillside  ; 
and  as  it  erodes  the  soil  and  sweeps  all  before  it, 
you  see  that  the  power  expended  by  the  sun  in 
lifting  it  was  not  lost,  but  only  stored  up  in  the 
form  of  potential  force.  And  thus  in  these  two 
cases  you  see  the  law  of  conservation.  But  ob- 
serve also  the  operation  of  our  other  law,  namely, 
that  of  correlation.  As  the  cannon  ball  was 
mounting  upward,  its  kinetic  force  was  being 
gradually  transformed  into  potential,  until  at  the 
moment  the  uppermost  limit  was  reached,  its 
kinetic  was  entirely  transformed  into,  and  existed 
alone  as  potential  force.  But  the  moment  the 
ball    began    to    descend,   its    potential    was    again 


FORCE.  27 

changed  back  into  kinetic  ;  and  thus  do  wc  find 
our  principle  of  correlation  also  operative.  But 
notice  still  further  the  operation  of  our  principles ; 
when  the  ball  reaches  the  earth  with  the  velocity 
acquired  in  the  descent,  what,  then,  becomes  of 
its  energy  ?  Has  it  not  now  been  lost  ?  Let  us 
see :  the  moment  the  ball  strikes  the  earth,  as 
the  result  of  impact,  heat  is  produced. 

Just  as  when  the  blacksmith  strikes  his  hammer 
on  the  anvil,  and  the  temperature  of  the  metal  is 
raised  as  the  result  of  impact,  so  when  our  ball 
reaches  the  earth  its  temperature,  as  well  as  that 
of  the  earth  on  which  it  falls,  is  suddenly  raised ; 
that  is,  heat  is  produced.  Now  we  learned  when 
speaking  of  the  experiment  of  Rumford,  that  heat 
was  proven  to  be  a  mode  of  force  ;  that  it  was  the 
dynamic  force  of  the  horse  transformed  into  heat 
force  in  the  cylinder.  So  when  the  descending 
ball  impinges  on  the  earth,  its  kinetic  force  is 
immediately  transformed  into  heat  force,  and  can 
be  changed  back  again  from  heat  force  into  that 
of  dynamic.  It  is  true  that  in  the  case  before  us 
all  of  the  dynamic  force  of  the  ball  is  not  trans- 
formed into  heat,  but  it  is  not  on  that  account 
lost.     The  falling  ball  has  influenced  the  earth  — 


28  FORCE. 

moved  it  out  of  its  course  in  a  certain  ratio,  and 
in  this  way  has  the  force  been  perpetuated. 

But  to  come  back  to  the  heat  produced  at  the 
moment  of  contact  of  the  ball  with  the  earth. 
Let  us  see  how  that,  though  its  energy  in  a  large 
measure  was  transformed  into  heat,  the  force  of 
the  descending  ball  was  still  conserved.  It  is  uni- 
versally known  that  heat  expands  metals.  If  you 
take  an  iron  bar,  measure  its  length  at  a  certain 
temperature,  say  of  thirty-two  degrees  Fahrenheit, 
and  then  measure  it  again  after  it  has  been  heated 
to  a  temperature  say  of  three  hundred  degrees 
Fahrenheit,  it  will  be  found  to  have  expanded. 
The  force  of  this  expansion  is  practically  unlimited. 
If  the  bar  is  free  to  extend  itself,  its  force  will  of 
course  not  be  observed ;  but  if  by  some  mechani- 
cal appliance  you  should  endeavor  to  resist  the 
force  of  expansion,  you  would  get  some  idea  of  its 
power.  And  so,  if  we  could  by  some  means 
measure  the  force  of  expansion  caused  by  the 
heat  produced  by  the  cannon-ball  at  the  moment 
of  impact  with  the  earth,  we  should  find  that  the 
dynamic  force  of  expansion  in  the  metal  ball,  plus 
that  of  the  earth,  would  be  practically  equal  to 
the  force  of  the  descending  ball. 


FORCE.  29 

Now,  see  what  we  have  here  :  First,  we  have 
the  kinetic  force  of  the  ball  as  it  mounts  upward  ; 
we  then  have  this  force  changed  into  an  equivalent 
of  potential  force  when  the  ball  has  reached  its 
highest  limit ;  we  then  have  this  potential  force 
changed  back  again  into  kinetic  force,  which  at 
the  moment  of  impact  with  the  earth,  is  equal  to 
the  force  with  which  it  was  originally  discharged. 
At  the  moment  of  impact  we  have  kinetic  force 
changed  into  its  equivalent  of  heat  for'ce,  and 
lastly  this  heat  force  changed  into  the  force  of 
expansion,  or,  what  is  the  same,  potential  force. 
And  thus  we  might  go  on  tracing  some  particular 
force  through  its  various  modes  back  and  forth, 
hither  and  thither,  until  however  skeptical  we 
mi2"ht  have  been  at  the  start,  we  should  at  last 
come  to  a  firm  faith  in  the  integrity  of  the  prin- 
ciples of  correlation  and  conservation. 

Now,  by  the  process  just  pursued  in  our  ex- 
amination of  motion  and  of  heat,  we  may  also  be 
convinced  that  electricity  too  is  but  one  out  of 
many  modes  of  force  ;  a  force  brought  out  of  some 
previously  existing  mode,  and  capable  of  being 
resolved  into  any  other  force,  such  as  heat,  motion, 
light,  etc.      To  one  who  has  kept  pace  with  the 


so  FORCE. 

progress  of  inventions,  and  taken  the  care  to  study 
into  their  methods  of  appHcation,  this  will  be 
apparent.  For  illuminating  purposes,  electricity 
has  now  come  into  practical  use.  But  whence 
comes  the  light  that  emanates  in  such  dazzling 
brilliancy  from  the  carbon  point,  or  the  arc,  as 
the  case  may  be }  We  say  it  is  produced  by  the 
electric  current  ;  but  what  produces  the  current } 

Follow  one  of  those  wires  to  its  starting-point 
and  you  will  be  let  into  the  secret.  There  is  a 
steam  engine  ;  as  its  wheels  revolve,  they  com- 
municate motion  to  two  bobbins,  which,  revolving 
at  a  high  rate  of  speed  in  close  proximity  to  the 
poles  of  a  powerful  magnet,  produce  a  current  of 
electricity  which  with  proper  mechanical  appli- 
ances gives  us  the  electric  light.  Now,  in  this 
operation  you  have  four  modes  of  force ;  heat, 
motion,  electricity  and  light.  The  force  of  heat 
in  the  fuel  is  first  transformed  into  that  of  motion  ; 
that  of  motion  into  that  of  electricity,  and  this 
again  into  that  of  light.  In  each  step  the  correla- 
tion appears,  and  each  successive  force  is  but  a 
transformation  of  the  one  that  preceded  it.  Each 
force  exhausts  its  predecessor,  and  takes  up  into  its 
own  form  of  energy  the  energy  of  its  predecessor. 


FORCE.  31 

Now  it  may  indeed  be  true  that  in  the  succes- 
sive steps  the  conservation  of  force  may  not  be 
clearly  demonstrated.  That  is,  the  force  of  elec- 
tricity may  not  be  the  exact  equivalent  of  the 
dynamic  force  expended  by  the  engine,  or  the 
force  of  motion  may  not  be  the  exact  equivalent 
of  the  expended  heat  force  ;  in  other  words,  we 
cannot  say,  strictly  speaking,  that  one  force  is 
definitely  and  equivalently  convertible  into  another. 
But  it  must  not  be  forgotten  that  the  initial  force 
has  not  been  lost  even  in  the  slightest  degree, 
though  it  may  have  been  dissipated  into  other 
forces  of  which  no  account  has  been  taken.  Thus, 
part  of  the  heat  force  may  have  gone  out  into 
the  air,  part  of  it  into  the  machinery  ;  part  of  the 
dynamic  force  of  the  steam  may  have  been  taken 
up  in  overcoming  friction  in  the  machinery,  and 
so,  while  the  exact  equivalent  of  the  original  force 
may  never  practically  be  reached  in  the  transfer- 
ence of  one  mode  into  that  of  another,  yet  if  the 
dissipated  energy  invariably  incident  to  the  con- 
verting of  forces  could  be  measured,  it  would  be 
found  that  no  particle  of  force  has  been  lost  or 
annihilated,  though  but  part  of  it  may  have  been 
converted  into  the  new  mode. 


32  FORCE. 

But  we  will  not  dwell  longer  in  illustrating  our 
principles  of  correlation  and  conservation  ;  we  take 
it  for  granted  that  they  already  are  sufficiently  un- 
derstood. By  the  same  process  it  might  easily  be 
shown  that  our  principles  apply  to  the  physical 
forces  of  plants  and  animals,  as  well  as  to  those 
forces  of  the  inorganic  world  which  we  have  just 
considered.  But  our  aim  has,  perhaps,  already 
been  attained,  which  was  to  show  that,  strictly 
speaking,  the  forces  present  in  the  universe  are 
not  of  various  kinds ;  on  the  contrary  what  are 
commonly  regarded  as  different  forces  are  to  be 
reckoned  as  but  different  modes  of  the  one  some- 
thing. Just  as  the  player  in  the  theatre  may 
personate  different  characters,  assume  different 
costumes,  and  yet  remain  the  same  person,  so 
may  this  something  we  call  force  assume  different 
roles,  passing  from  one  mode  to  another  without 
being  lost  or  annihilated.  And  thus  the  store  of 
force  with  which  the  universe  was  at  its  beginning 
endowed,  remains  constantly  the  same,  undimin- 
ished by  the  slightest  amount,  and  will  go  on  in 
its  changes  and  evolutions,  restoring  at  the  last 
the  precise  number  and  value  of  the  talents  origi- 
nally intrusted. 


FORCE.  ZZ 

But  we  come  now  to  the  more  important  phase  of 
our  subject,  and  to  inquire,  Whence  comes  force? 
What  is  its  origin  ?  We  can  trace  it  as  under  its 
changing  forms  it  seemingly  endeavors  to  elude 
pursuit ;  we  can  prove  its  identity  as  here  it  ap- 
pears in  heat,  there  in  motion,  or  here  again  in 
electricity,  but  can  we  not  go  further,  and  come  to 
know  something  as  to  the  nature,  or  perhaps  even 
as  to  the  origin  of  force  ?  Let  us  make  the  at- 
tempt. If  our  principles  of  conservation  and  cor- 
relation hold,  we  must  not  look  for  the  origin  of 
force  in  time  ;  that  is,  in  the  present  order  of  things. 
For  if  forces  were  constantly  being  produced  in 
nature,  and  if,  as  we  have  seen,  no  force  once  in  ex- 
istence is  annihilated,  we  should  have  the  anomaly 
of  constantly  increasing  force,  which  would  in- 
validate our  principle  of  correlation  ;  for  this 
principle  requires  that  every  new  mode  of  force 
shall  come  from  the  exhaustion  of  some  force 
previously  existing.  For  instance,  when  motion 
is  produced  from  heat,  heat-force  is  simply  trans- 
formed into  that  of  motion.  Prof.  Helmholtz,  in 
his  demonstration  of  the  impossibility  of  per- 
petual motion,  has  clearly  proven  this  to  be  true, 
and,  at  the  same  time,  shown  that  one  mode  of 


34  FORCE. 

force  exists  but  at  the  expense  of  another.  If 
this  were  not  true,  and  if  new  forces  could  be 
created  or  developed  without  the  exhaustion  of 
others,  then  would  perpetual  motion  be  possible. 
But,  if  our  principle  of  correlation  holds  (and  not 
a  single  fact  can  be  produced  to  invalidate  it), 
then  must  we  look  in  vain  for  any  new  force  as 
being  developed  out  of  the  material  world. 

The  modern  statement  of  the  principle  of  cor- 
relation is,  according  to  the  author  of  the  "  Unseen 
Universe,"  briefly  this  :  *'  In  any  system  of  bodies 
whatever,  to  which  no  energy  is  communicated  by 
external  bodies,  and  which  parts  with  no  energy 
to  external  bodies,  the  sum  of  the  various  potential 
and  kinetic  energies  remains  forever  unaltered." 

In  other  words,  while  one  form  of  energy 
becomes  changed  into  another,  each  change  rep- 
resents at  once  a  creation  of  one  kind  of  energy, 
and  a  simultaneous  and  equal  annihilation  of  an- 
other, the  total  energy  present  remaining  forever 
unaltered.  It  is  then  at  least  certain  that  matter 
cannot  create  force,  and  that  from  no  laboratory 
in  which  the  mere  natural  is  brought  into  relation, 
can  force  come  as  a  product.  Outside,  then,  of 
the  material  world,  must  we  look  for  the  origin  of 


FORCE.  35 

force.  Nor  can  it  be  said  that  force  itself  is 
matter  in  any  of  its  forms.  The  fallacy  of  such 
a  notion  was  long  since  exposed  by  the  illustrious 
Mayer,  in  his  work  on  Force.  Force  may  act 
on  matter :  it  may  likewise  change  the  form  of 
the  material ;  may  hold  its  parts  together  by  co- 
hesion, chemical  affinity,  or  gravity ;  may  operate 
with  it  as  the  moulder  operates  with  the  clay ; 
may  lift  ponderous  masses  from  the  earth,  and 
toss  them  with  the  ease  that  a  boy  tosses  his  ball 
into  the  air  ;  but  force  ever  remains  apart  and 
distinct  from  that  upon  which  it  operates. 

But  here,  as  the  result  of  what  we  have  just 
been  considering,  the  question  may  come,  Does 
force  exist  apart  from  matter }  Can  it  be  said  to 
have  an  existence  apart  from  the  material,  so  that 
if  matter  were  to  be  destroyed,  force  would  not  be 
destroyed  t  So  intimately  are  matter  and  force 
united,  that  it  has  come  to  be  believed  by  many 
that  an  essential  relation  exists  between  the  two  ; 
a  relation  so  intimate  that  one  could  not  continue 
to  be  without  the  other.  By  some  matter  has  been 
defined  as  the  seat  or  vehicle  of  energy  ;  implying 
that  without  matter  force  could  have  no  existence. 
Now,   if    it  be   denied   that   anything   exists   save 


36  FORCE. 

that  which  may  be  apprehended  by  the  sense, 
and  as  it  is  apprehended  by  the  sense,  then  force 
may  not  exist  apart  from  matter.  But  against 
such  a  limitation  of  our  knowledge  the  common 
consciousness  of  humanity  protests.  The  fact 
that  two  things,  so  far  as  the  testimony  of  the 
sense  goes,  always  are  found  associated,  is  no 
proof  that  they  are  essentially  one,  or  that  they 
cannot  exist  apart.  To  insist  on  such  a  doc- 
trine would  not  only  be  to  break  down  the  most 
inspiring  hopes  of  mankind,  but  to  stultify  the 
universal  consciousness  of  humanity. 

That  no  one,  guided  simply  by  the  testimony  of 
the  sense,  could  say  that  the  soul  and  the  body 
are  not  essentially  one,  is  apparent.  We  have  no 
sense  faculty  that  can  get  between  and  differen- 
tiate the  two.  We  have  never  seen  them  sepa- 
rated, and  we  have  no  empyrical  proof  that  they 
can  be.  But  not  simply  as  a  revolt  from  the  grim 
consequences  of  admitting  their  essential  unity 
and  dependence,  but,  as  the  necessary  outcome  of 
all  true  thinking,  we  have  come  to  regard  them  as 
essentially  separate;  one  as  material,  the  other  as 
immaterial,  though  in  the  i)resent  order  of  things 
always  found  together.     And  so  it  comes  to  be  at 


FORCE.  37 

least  thinkable,  that  force  may  exist  apart  from 
matter,  though  so  far  as  experience  goes  they  are 
always  associated.  The  oversight  on  the  part  of 
those  who  maintain  that  force  may  not  exist  apart 
from  matter  is  this  :  that  apart  from  matter  it 
cannot  be  apprehended  by  the  sense  ;  it  is  alone 
as  force  operates  on  matter  that  it  can  appeal  to 
the  sense,  for  by  the  sense  we  can  know  the  mate- 
rial alone.  But  we  are  not  left  thus  to  reason 
out  the  possibility  of  the  separate  existence  of 
force.  We  know  that  at  certain  moments  its  ex- 
istence must  be  separate.  From  the  first  we  have 
spoken  of  the  force  of  the  sun  as  operating  on 
the  earth.  Now  what  had  we  there  .^  On  the  one 
hand  an  immense  mass  of  matter  called  the  sun  ; 
on  the  other,  our  globe  made  up  of  matter  also. 
But  these  immense  masses  of  matter  are  separated 
from  each  other  about  ninety-five  million  of  miles. 
Associated  with  the  material  of  the  sun  are  pro- 
digious forces.  How  did  these  happen  to  affect  our 
world }  For  unquestionably  these  same  forces, 
originally  existing  and  operating  in  the  sun,  are 
now  present  in  the  earth  in  the  form  of  life,  heat, 
etc.  But  why  are  they  here .''  There  was  a 
time  when   they  existed  in    association   with   the 


38  FORCE. 

matter  of  the  sun  ;  they  are  now  associated  with 
the  matter  of  the  earth.  Therefore  there  must 
have  been  a  stage  in  which  the  force,  having  left 
the  sun,  had  not  yet  reached  the  earth  ;  a  period, 
the  duration  of  which  we  cannot  estimate,  but 
which  must  certainly  have  been  of  considerable 
duration,  when  the  force  was  to  be  associated  with 
neither  the  sun  nor  the  earth,  but  en  route.  Dur- 
ing that  period,  however  long  or  short,  energy 
must  have  existed  disassociated  from  matter,  and 
had  an  existence  as  simple  force. 

The  same  is  true  whenever  force  passes  from 
one  body  to  another ;  during  the  time  of  its  pas- 
sage it  cannot  be  conceived  as  associated  w^ith 
matter  as  we  know  matter,  but  exists  as  free,  pure 
force.  And  so,  while  apart  from  matter  we  may 
not  be  able  to  demonstrate  its  presence  in  any 
particular  place  any  more  than  the  beam  of  light 
may  be  seen  apart  from  the  dust  particles  afloat  in 
the  air  of  the  room,  yet  it  is  plain  that  it  must 
exist  in  some  form  during  the  period  of  transition 
or  it  could  not  reveal  itself  again  in  the  one  after  it 
had  left  the  other.  We  are  aware  that  to  this  it  may 
be  replied,  that  the  ether  itself  is  matter,  and  hence 
force  en  route  is  never  for  a  moment  really  disas- 


FORCE.  39 

sociated  from  matter,  but  co-exists  with  the  matter 
particles  of  the  ether.  Now  we  have  no  disposi- 
tion to  discuss  this  point  at  length.  It  is  clear  at 
a  glance  that  if  the  ether  is  matter,  then  it  is 
matter  from  which  everything  which  we  have  come 
to  regard  as  characteristic  of  the  material,  has  been 
eliminated.  A  material  through  which  a  body  like 
the  earth,  surrounded  by  an  atmosphere,  at  a 
velocity  of  a  hundred  thousand  feet  per  second, 
can  pass  without  resistance,  and  without  even 
loosing  its  atmospheric  envelop,  is  simply  incon- 
ceivable. And  yet  no  fact  in  physical  astronomy 
is  more  clearly  established  than  that  the  earth 
does  this,  and  that  the  resistance  of  the  ether  to 
the  earth,  in  spite  of  its  immense  velocity,  is  in 
reality  nothing.  Moreover,  however  attenuated 
the  matter  of  the  ether  might  be,  it  cannot  be  con- 
ceived how  even  a  gaseous  body  like  that  of  a 
comet,  shooting  through  the  spaces  at  a  rate  sur- 
passing a  thousand  times  that  of  a  cannon  ball, 
could  pass  without  being  dissipated  or  even  re- 
tarded in  the  slightest  degree.  For  if  matter,  how- 
ever minutely  divided,  must  offer  resistance,  even 
though  that  resistance  may  decrease  as  the  subdi- 
vision  goes    on,  and    matter   becomes    more    and 


40  FORCE. 

more  attenuated,  there  cannot  come  a  point  when 
resistance  will  be  zero.  If  matter  be  present  at  all, 
the  zero  point  will  be  arrived  at  the  moment  that 
all  matter  as  we  know  it  is  eliminated,  and  not  a 
moment  before.  But  when  the  zero  point  is  once 
reached,  and  resistance  is  nothing,  then  is  matter 
as  we  know  it  necessarily  absent. 

But  we  may  go  further  than  that.  It  has  come 
to  be  an  axiom  of  Science  that  energy  becomes 
more  and  more  marked  as  the  grosser  material  is 
eliminated.  You  may  start,  for  instance,  with 
some  form  of  matter,  come  up  from  one  grade  of 
the  material  to  another  still  more  subtle,  and  at 
each  step,  instead  of  energy  growing  less  as  you 
recede  from  the  grosser  to  the  more  subtle,  it 
becomes,  on  the  contrary,  greater  and  more  active. 
Thus  if  a  point  could  be  reached  at  which  mat- 
ter would  be  completely  eliminated,  that  point 
would  be  the  point  of  pure  energy.  And  thus  it 
becomes  no  longer  a  question  whether  force  can 
exist  apart  from  matter,  as  we  know  matter  ;  in- 
deed it  would  be  more  to  the  point  to  ask  whether 
matter  can  exist  apart  from  force,  than  to  ask 
whether  force  can  exist  apart  from  matter.  If 
force   passes  from  world   to  world,  as  it  certainly 


FORCE.  41 

does  across  immeasurable  spaces,  then,  during  the 
period  of  its  passage,  its  existence  is  an  existence 
apart  from  the  material.  And  if  it  be  true,  as 
Science  teaches,  that  energy  in  the  universe  be- 
comes greater  as  we  get  further  and  further  from 
the  mere  material,  and  approach  nearer  and  nearer 
the  immaterial,  then  it  becomes  well-nigh  certain 
that  when  the  realm  of  the  immaterial  is  once 
reached,  force  instead  of  ceasing  to  be,  would  but 
become  pure  in  its  character  and  perfectly  active  in 
its  operations.  It  may  therefore  be  affirmed  that 
while  matter  and  force  in  the  present  order  of 
things  are  intimately  associated,  they  are  by  no 
means  inseparable ;  may  even  in  the  present  uni- 
verse exist  apart,  and  that  the  origin  of  force  is 
not  to  be  found  in  the  material.  Back  of  matter, 
prior  in  time  to  the  history  of  the  present  material 
universe  are  we  driven  in  our  search  for  the 
origin  of  force.  We  must  find  it,  if  we  find  it  at 
all,  in  the  immaterial,  the  unseen. 

But  as  matter  cannot  generate  energy,  so  neither 
can  life.  The  idea  that  life  can  generate  energy 
has  long  been  abandoned.  Life  is  energy.  To 
say,  therefore,  that  energy  is  produced  by  life 
would  be  simply  to  affirm  that  force  is  produced 


42  FORCE. 

by  force,  and  thus  to  reason  in  a  circle.  But  now 
observe  to  what  we  have  come.  In  our  search  for 
the  origin  of  this  something  called  force,  we  trav- 
erse the  fields  of  the  material  and  the  living  in 
vain.  Ask  where  are  the  secret  springs  of  forces 
that  are  ever  playing  in  the  universe,  and  the 
answer  that  comes  from  matter  is,  they  are  not  in 
me.  Life  too  answers  they  are  not  in  me.  Even 
time  answers  they  are  not  in  me. 

And  now  we  may  venture  to  ask.  May  not  that 
profound  investigator,  W.  R.  Grove,  who  with  keen 
insight  and  unsurpassed  skill,  pushed  his  investiga- 
tions to  the  uttermost  scientific  limits,  may  he  not 
have  been  right,  when  he  said,  ''  causation  is  the 
will,  creation  the  act  of  God".?  May  Carpenter 
not  have  been  right  when  he  said,  *'  The  convert- 
ibility of  the  physical  forces,  the  correlation  of 
these  with  the  vital,  and  the  intimacy  of  that  nexus 
between  mental  and  bodily  activity,  which,  explain 
it  as  we  may,  cannot  be  denied,  all  lead  upward 
towards  one  and  the  same  conclusion,  the  source  of 
all  power  in  mind  ;  and  that  philosophical  conclu- 
sion is  the  apex  of  a  pyramid  which  has  its  foun- 
dation in  the  ])rimitivc  instincts  of  humanity"  } 

Ikit  having  looked  in  vain  for  the  origin  of  force 


FORCE.  43 

in  the  material,  having  looked  in  vain  for  it  in  the 
realm  of  the  living,  there  yet  remains  another  field 
open  to  our  search.  Before  we  come  to  it,  how- 
ever, let  us  note  one  thing  :  the  better  we  come  to 
know  force,  the  more  does  it  assume  the  nature  of 
something  guided  by  intelligence;  in  other  words, 
the  more  we  know  of  it  the  more  do  we  suspect 
its  voluntary  origin.  It  is  gradually  coming  to  be 
settled  that  force  as  it  works  unhindered  in  the 
universe  is  not  blind,  but  that  it  ever  works  to  a 
rational  end.  It  is  because  this  fact  has  been  per- 
sistently overlooked,  that  many  of  its  operations 
have  gone  unexplained.  Hitherto  it  has  been  de- 
manded in  scientific  discussion  that  no  fact  shall 
be  explained  by  the  introduction  of  a  factor  out- 
side the  merely  natural.  On  this  principle  many 
have  worked  in  their  interpretation  of  the  facts  of 
force,  but  with  the  most  unsatisfactory  results. 
Theory  after  theory  has  been  advanced,  but  no 
single  one  as  yet  has  been  adequate  to  the  task  of 
explaining  all  the  facts.  That  force  refuses  to  be 
thus  interpreted  is  attested  by  the  fact  that,  after 
a  century  of  theorizing,  we  have  even  now  no 
theory  that  can  explain  either  the  forces  of  life  or 
gravity  ;   the  very  forces   which  of  all  have  been 


44  FORCE. 

most  carefully  studied.  Until  Science  is  willing 
to  lift  her  eyes  above  the  merely  natural,  she  must 
fail  in  every  attempt  to  account  for  the  most  com- 
mon facts  of  force. 

But  a  new  day  has  already  begun  to  dawn.  It 
has  come  to  be  understood  that  no  hypothesis 
built  alone  on  the  material  can  account  in  any 
manner  for  the  operations  of  vital  forces  ;  and 
equally  frank  is  becoming  the  admission  that  the 
most  plausible  theory  of  gravitation  hitherto  ad- 
vanced from  the  materialistic  side,  namely,  that  of 
Le  Sage,  will  neither  account  for  the  facts,  nor  is 
yet  consistent  with  common  sense.  The  tendency 
now  in  science  is  to  the  recognition  of  an  intelli- 
gent principle  back  of  and  as  directing  force  in 
its  operations. 

In  his  Outlines  of  Astronomy,  Sir  John  Her- 
schel  does  not  hesitate  to  say,  *'  It  is  reasonable  to 
regard  the  force  of  gravitation  as  the  direct  or 
indirect  result  of  a  consciousness  or  will  exerted 
somewhere." 

In  a  recent  lecture  delivered  in  New  York,  by 
Professor  C.  A.  Young,  the  astronomer  of  Prince- 
ton College,  you  find  these  words  :  "  How  it  is 
that  one  atom  of  matter  can  attract  another  atom, 


FORCE.  45 

no  matter  how  great  the  distance,  no  matter  what 
intervening  substances  there  may  be;  how  it  will 
act  upon  it,  or  at  least  behave  as  if  it  acted  on  it, 
I  do  not  know,  I  cannot  tell.  Whether  they  are 
pushed  together  by  means  of  an  intervening  ether, 
or  what  is  their  action,  I  cannot  understand.  It 
stands  with  me  along  with  the  fact  that  when  I 
will  that  my  arm  shall  rise,  it  rises.  It  is  inscruta- 
ble ;  all  the  explanations  that  have  been  given  of 
it  seem  to  me  merely  to  darken  counsel  with  words 
and  no  meaning.  They  do  not  remove  the  diffi- 
culty at  all.  If  I  were  to  say  what  I  really  believe, 
it  would  be  that  the  motion  of  the  spheres  of  the 
material  universe  stand  in  some  such  relation  to 
Him  in  whom  all  things  exist,  the  ever-present 
and  omnipotent  God,  that  the  motion  of  my  body 
does  to  my  will." 

That  is  a  remarkable  statement,  and  all  the  more 
so  as  coming  from  one  prominent  in  the  ranks 
of  those  who  have  hitherto  protested  against  the 
introduction  of  a  higher  factor  in  explanation 
of  existing  facts.  But  not  less  noticeable  are 
the  words  of  Lionel  S.  Beale  in  recrard  to  the 
forces  of  life.  Watching  the  cell  through  the  tube 
of  his  microscope,  with   an   experience  and    skill 


46  FORCE. 

unsurpassed  by  any  investigator  in  his  depart- 
ment, and  impelled  also  to  account  in  some  way 
for  the  facts  observed,  these  are  his  words  :  "  Over 
and  over  again,  cells  have  been  compared  with 
laboratories  ;  but  the  chemist  in  these  cell  labo- 
ratories has  been  ignored;  and  with  machines,  the 
constructor  of  which,  as  well  as  the  engineer  and 
manager,  has  been  entirely  left  out  of  consider- 
ation." ''Authority  may  continue  to  refuse  to  ad- 
mit, or  may  deem  it  expedient  to  deny  that  the 
living  state  differs  absolutely  and  entirely  from 
the  non-living  condition,  but  the  truth  remains 
that  in  the  living  state  of  matter,  whether  it  be 
the  living  matter  of  a  growing  fungus,  or  that  con- 
cerned in  mental  action,  material  forces  and  prop- 
erties are  somehow  governed  and  controlled,  and 
in  a  manner  not  to  be  imitated  by  us,  or  to  be  ex- 
plained by  anything  known  concerning  non-living 
matter,  while  it  is  incontestable  that  the  moment 
the  matter  ceases  to  live,  its  capacity  for  mani- 
festing its  ordinary  properties  returns  ;  in  fact,  in 
all  life  we  must  admit  the  operation  of  a  power  or 
infUience  far  removed  from  the  physical  category. 
This  i)sychical  factor  has  never  been  explained 
away,  and  is  the  life  of  every  living  thing." 


FORCE.  47 

And  thus  it  is  coming  to  be  admitted  that,  in 
order  to  explain  the  two  modes  of  force,  namely, 
that  of  gravity  and  that  of  life,  a  higher  factor 
than  the  merely  physical  must  be  introduced,  as 
well  as  that  force  is  somehow  affected  and  con- 
trolled by,  if  it  is  not  indeed  the  outcome  of, 
intelligence. 

And  now  the  results  of  these  admissions  are  at 
once  apparent.  If  these  two  modes  of  force,  the 
one  in  the  realm  of  the  material,  the  other  in  the 
realm  of  the  vital,  are  to  be  accounted  for  alone 
on  the  assumption  of  an  underlying  intelligent 
principle,  then  may  all  modes  be  accounted  for  in 
the  same  manner.  For  introduce  into  the  universe 
these  two  modes  of  energy  as  initial,  admit  them 
to  have  come  out  of  intelligence,  and  then,  accord- 
ing to  the  principle  of  correlation,  every  mode 
may  have  been  evolved  from  them.  Let  gravity 
be  the  initial  force  in  the  realm  of  the  non-living, 
and  out  of  it,  as  we  have  learned,  will  come  motion, 
heat,  electricity,  light,  and  the  entire  category  of 
physical  forces.  Let  life  in  its  simplest  form  be 
once  introduced,  and  out  of  it  can  come  every 
vital  force  operating  in  the  organic  world.  Fix 
your  attention  on  that.     If  gravity  and  life  have 


48  FORCE. 

their  origin  not  in  the  material,  but  the  intelligent ; 
if  these  two  forces  in  the  statement  of  Herschel 
are  to  be  traced  as  the  result  directly  or  indirectly 
of  *' will  exerted  somewhere"  —  if  that  can  be 
made  out ;  if  there  is  a  force  in  the  universe  with 
which  gravity  and  life  stand  correlated,  and  which 
is  itself  correlated  but  on  the  one  side,  and  if  that 
force  is  intelligent,  then  may  every  mode  of  force 
be  traced,  in  respect  of  its  origin,  directly  to  the 
immaterial,  the  spiritual,  the  intelligent. 

It  is  therefore  more  than  a  presumption  that  in 
the  last  analysis  all  force  must  be  resolved  into 
voluntary  energy,  and  the  strength  of  our  propo- 
sition, that  ''force  is  voluntary  energy  directly  or 
indirectly  applied,"  is  made  to  appear.  But  we 
have  one  point  yet  to  examine. 

We  have  just  seen  that  force  in  its  operations, 
when  thoroughly  studied,  compels  the  admission 
of  intelligence  back  of  it  ;  and  that  the  motions 
of  the  planetary  bodies,  as  well  as  those  of  the 
cell,  have  their  nearest  parallel  in  the  motions  of 
the  human  body  under  the  control  of  will.  From 
this  there  is  but  a  step  to  our  proposition.  Before 
we  take  it,  however,  one  thing  must  concern  us  ; 
we  must  ask,  — 


FORCE.  49 

Does  voluntary  energy  meet  the  requirements 
demanded  by  the  idea  of  an  original  force  ?  It 
may  be  that  voluntary  energy  itself  stands  in  cor- 
relation with  some  previously  existing  force ;  per- 
haps when  brought  under  inspection  it  is  not  of 
itself  original.  In  our  search  we  cannot  stop  short 
of  the  ultimate. 

Now  the  idea  of  an  original  force  demands  that 
such  strength  shall  be  underived ;  that  is,  that  its 
energy  shall  somehow  be  self-developed  ;  impart- 
ing, but  not  receiving,  or,  in  other  words,  corre- 
lated but  on  the  one  side.  Any  force  claiming  to 
be  original  must  fully  satisfy  these  requirements. 
And  so  it  is  necessary  to  ask.  Have  we  such  a 
force  in  will }  Is  not  its  energy  to  be  traced  to 
some  other  mode  t  If  these  facts  can  be  estab- 
lished, then  is  it  orio;inal,  ultimate. 

In  coming  to  the  solution  of  this  question  one 
thing  must  not  be  overlooked,  and  that  is,  that 
will,  as  we  here  know  it,  is  by  no  means  what  it 
must  be  in  its  normal  existence.  It  is  a  question 
whether  it  is  absolutely  unconditioned  even  by  its 
material  environments,  and  yet  we  cannot,  even 
with  its  present  surroundings,  speak  of  it  but  as 
free,  and    as  virtually  unconditioned.     What  will 


50       ^  FORCE. 

must  be,  in  the  person  of  Him  who  is  the  abso- 
lutely unconditioned,  we  do  not  know,  we  cannot 
tell.  It  is  different  at  least  from  ours,  and  yet, 
environed  as  the  human  will  is,  its  energy  is  the 
only  original  energy  known  to  us.  Of  it  alone 
can  it  be  said,  It  speaks,  and  it  is  done ;  it  com- 
mands, and  it  stands  fast.  Take,  if  you  please, 
some  piece  of  mechanism  to  which  motion  has 
been  imparted  by  human  power  —  let  it  for  ex- 
ample be  a  clock.  You  may  trace  the  motion  of 
one  part  to  another,  and  this  to  still  another, 
throughout  the  entire  series,  from  the  pendulum 
to  the  mainspring  ;  and  as  you  do  so,  you  have 
an  illustration,  on  a  small  scale,  of  the  principles 
of  correlation  and  conservation.  Begin  with  the 
force  farthest  removed  from  the  central  one  —  the 
mainspring.  Start  with  the  motion  of  the  pendu- 
lum, as,  swinging  back  and  forth,  it  measures  the 
flying  seconds. 

Here  you  have  a  force  ;  but  you  can,  according 
to  the  principle  of  transmutation  of  energy,  trace 
the  force  expressed  in  the  motion  of  the  pendulum 
to  the  force  of  the  escapement  wheel  ;  this  to  the 
next  wheel  in  the  system,  and  so  on  till  you  come 
to  the  spring,  the  original  force  in  the  mechanism. 


FORCE.  51 

But  when  you  come  to  the  spring  you  have  not 
yet  reached  the  Umit.  The  force  exerted  by  the 
spring  is  but  the  equivalent  of  a  certain  amount 
of  muscular  energy  expended  in  the  winding. 
Your  muscular  energy  may  be  traced  again  to 
nerV'Ous  force ;  this  nervous  force  again  to  the 
displacement  or  motion  of  certain  particles  of 
the  brain,  and,  finally,  the  motion  of  these  brain 
particles  may  be  traced  to  the  will.  But  ob- 
serve that  you  have  now  reached  the  ultimate. 
Back  of  the  will  you  cannot  go.  You  cannot  take 
another  step  in  the  regressus ;  the  will  is  the 
ultimate. 

And  so  it  is  seen  that  among  the  known  forces 
in  the  universe,  voluntary  energy  alone  can  lay 
claim  to  being  original.  Every  other  known  force 
may  be  traced  to  some  other  force  preceding,  but 
back  of  energy  in  volition  we  cannot  go. 

And  now  what  are  the  conclusions  to  which  we 
are  inevitably  led }  If  analogy  counts  for  any- 
thing, then  may  it  not  be  said  that  in  will  as  we 
know  it,  operating  as  it  does,  not  alone  in  con- 
trolling, but  also  in  imparting  motion  to  the  body, 
and  through  the  body  —  putting  into  the  world 
new  and    original    forces  —  may  we  not   say  that 


52  FORCE. 

in  this  we  have  a  fact  in  the  light  of  which  the 
universe  may  be  interpreted  ?  And  may  it  not 
with  certainty  be  affirmed  that  every  force,  from 
those  that  control  the  atom,  on  up  to  those  which 
drive  the  planets  in  their  fiery  orbits  with  resist- 
less might,  are  but  the  emanations  of  a  supreme 
will  exerted  in  the  beginning  ?  Aside  from  energy 
in  volition,  there  is  no  original  force  known  to  us. 
It  alone  satisfies  the  idea,  in  that  it  comes  from 
no  pre-existing  mode.  It  alone  imparts,  but  re- 
ceives not,  the  only  factor  that  can  put  a  power 
into  the  endless  cycle  of  forces  that  shall  go  on 
into  the  eternities,  yet  itself  remaining  outside 
the  cycle,  its  energy  underived,  unconditioned, 
ultimate. 

And  now  go  out  into  the  universe  with  this  con- 
ception of  force  as  coming  out  of  intelligence ; 
sit  with  Herschel,  and  Newton,  and  Kepler,  and 
Tycho  Brahe  ;  watch  the  mustering  squadrons  of 
suns  and  moons  and  stars  as,  in  fiery  armor,  obedi- 
ent to  the  laws  of  nature,  they  march  on  in  grand 
review.  Sit  with  Heinrich  Frey  and  Lionel  Beale 
before  the  cell  as  it  builds  the  wondrous  fabric  of 
nerve  and  fiber  and  muscle,  in  conformity  to  plan, 
and  nature  will   no  longer  be  inexplicable.      Back 


PORCE.  S3 

of  force  in  planetary  and  cell  movement  there  will 
be  found  will.  Back  of  will,  a  Person  ;  He  who 
was,  and  is,  and  is  to  come. 

"  He  whose  presence  bright 
All  space  doth  occupy,  all  motion  guide 
Unchanged  through  times  all-devastating  flight, 

Mighty  One. 
Whom  none  can  comprehend,  and  none  explore, 
Who  fill'st  existence  with  thyself  alone 
Embracing  all,  supporting,  ruling  o'er, 
Being  whom  we  call  God,  and  know  no  more." 


MIND. 

"  The  doctrine  of  the  materialists  v/as  always,  even  hi  my  youth, 
a  cold,  heavy,  dull  and  insupportable  doctrine  to  me,  and  necessa- 
rily tending  to  Atheism.  When  I  had  heard  with  disgust,  in  the 
dissecting  rooms,  the  plan  of  the  physiologist,  of  the  gradual 
accretion  of  matter  and  its  becoming  endowed  with  irritability, 
ripening  into  sensibility,  and  acquiring  such  organs  as  were  neces- 
sary, by  its  own  inherent  forces,  and  at  last  rising  into  intellectual 
existence,  a  walk  into  the  green  fields  or  woods,  by  the  banks  of 
the  river,  brought  back  my  feelings  from  nature  to  God." — Sir 
Humphry  Davy.     "Consolations  in  Travel,"  p.  206. 

"  We  are  led  by  a  scientific  logic  to  an  unseen,  and  by  scien- 
tific analogy  to  the  spirituality  of  this  unseen.  In  fine,  our  con- 
clusion is,  that  the  visible  universe  has  been  developed  by  an 
intelligence  resident  in  the  unseen."  —  *'  Unseen  Universe,"  p.  22;?. 


MIND. 

About  the  time  that  Jesus  was  born  in  Bethle- 
hem of  Judea,  there  flourished  an  illustrious  poet 
and  philosopher,  Titus  Carus  Lucretius.  He  came 
upon  times  when  corruption  had  penetrated  every 
fiber  and  vein  of  the  national  life,  when  extrava- 
gance and  lust  rioted  in  the  heart  of  society,  and 
when  the  whole  system  of  national  and  social  life 
was  cancerous  to  the  very  core.  Amid  the  out- 
rages of  that  awful  epoch  life  had  lost  its  power 
to  charm,  and  suicide,  glorified  by  the  stoics,  was 
recommended  as  the  surest  refuge  against  the  vice 
and  despairing  misery  of  the  times.  But  while 
life  had  become  a  burden,  and  death  was  to  be 
chosen  as  a  relief  from  life's  misery,  "  the  dread 
of  something  after  death  "  made  men  cling  to  an 
existence  that  was  scarcely  to  be  endured. 

It  was  but  natural  that  out  of  such  times  there 
should  come  a  characteristic  philosophy,  or  rather, 
that  the  thinking  out  of  which  the  disordered  state 
sprang,  should  take  form  in  a  philosophic  system. 

57 


58  MIND. 

To  the  keen  mind  of  Lucretius,  it  was  obvious  that 
the  dread  of  the  unseen,  into  which  men  haunted 
by  a  guilty  conscience  feared  to  go,  was  brought 
about  by  the  belief  in  the  gods,  "the  avenging 
deities  "  that  took  account  of  the  sinful  deeds  of 
the  present  life,  and  who,  in  a  future  one,  would 
certainly  institute  a  reckoning.  But  since  this 
fear  was  what  kept  men  chained  to  an  existence 
from  which  they  longed  to  be  free,  it  became  im- 
portant that  it  be  dissolved,  and  that  the  belief 
in  the  gods,  out  of  which  it  evidently  came,  be 
demonstrated  as  groundless. 

It  was  to  this  task  that  Lucretius  came.  He 
aimed  to  show  the  emptiness  of  all  belief  in  an 
over-intelligence  as  concerned  in  the  affairs  of 
the  world  and  men,  and  ascribed  all  things  to 
natural  causes.  With  him  the  universe  found  its 
explanation  in  the  ''primitive  atom."  In  the  rock, 
the  unyielding  iron,  and  the  denser  bodies,  the 
material  atoms  out  of  which,  according  to  his  sys- 
tem, the  universe  was  built,  stood  in  close  contact. 
In  the  air,  the  ether,  in  the  sunlight  and  gases, 
these  atoms  were  less  closely  related  ;  and  thus 
in  the  universe  without,  the  atom  and  its  relations 
were  made  to  account  for  all,  and  mind,  spirit,  the 


MIND.  59 

gods,  could  not  be.  But  while  with  his  atoms 
which  he  made  the  cause  and  explanation  of  all 
things,  Lucretius  dissolved  the  gods,  leaving  noth- 
ing in  the  outer  universe  but  matter,  there  still 
remained  a  fact  for  which  he  had  to  account  —  it 
was  the  fact  of  mind  within.  Of  a  mind  without 
men  could  not  be  so  certain.  True,  they  thought 
they  saw  its  evidences  in  the  world  about  them  ; 
they  thought  they  heard,  in  seasons  of  reflection, 
the  mind  without  speaking  to  the  mind  within,  but 
of  this  they  had  no  absolute  proof :  it  might  and 
it  might  not  be.  But  of  mind  within  they  were 
certain  ;  men  knew  that  they  thought.  They  felt 
that  thought  was  not,  and  could  not  be,  matter, 
and  so,  while  the  material  atom  might  be  made  to 
account  for  all  that  was  without,  it  could  not  so 
well  account  for  that  which  went  on  w^ithin  —  it 
could  not  account  for  mind  out  of  which  thought 
sprang.  They  saw,  too,  that  if  all  was  not  matter 
within,  then  all  might  not  be  matter  without ;  and 
that  if  mind  lived  in  man  it  might  live  out  of 
man  ;  might  be  back  of  nature,  and  thus,  after 
all,  be  in  the  universe.  And  so  Lucretius  had  to 
readjust  his  system  ;  had  to  go  further  perhaps 
than  he  had  at  first  calculated.     In  short,  he  had  to 


6o  MIND. 

explain  mind  as  he  had  explained  matter.  And 
so  he  said  that,  like  matter,  mind  was  made  up  of 
atoms  free  to  move  among  each  other,  and  that 
the  rapidity  of  mental  operations  was  to  be  ex- 
plained from  the  fact  that  the  atoms  concerned  in 
thought  were  round  and  perfectly  smooth,  as  well 
as  small  in  size.  And  thus  with  Lucretius  matter 
was  deified  that  mind  might  be  eliminated.  With 
him  the  material  was  all.  Those  entities  that  we 
call  mind  and  soul  are  born  and  perish  with  us ; 
nothing  is  but  *' body  and  void." 

As  might  have  been  predicted,  the  philosophy 
of  Lucretius,  created  as  it  was  for  the  avowed  pur- 
pose of  breaking  down  intelligence,  thoughtful  as 
it  was  in  some  of  its  features,  came  to  naught  in 
the  very  age  in  which  he  lived,  A  universe  with- 
out intelligence  could  not  satisfy  the  reason  even 
in  its  simplest  processes,  and  men  saw  that  a  sys- 
tem from  which  mind  was  ignored,  or  in  which  it 
was  made  to  be  but  a  phenomenon  of  matter,  could 
lay  no  claim  to  being  a  true  philosophy. 

Lucretius,  in  regard  to  his  theory,  might  have 
learned  wisdom  from  his  contemporary  :  '*  Far  more 
easily  will  wc  be  able  to  build  a  city  in  the  air,  than 
on  earth  to  found  a  city  without  the  gods." 


MIND.  6 1 

And  yet,  strange  as  it  may  seem,  in  almost  every 
age  since  Lucretius,  men  have  worked  upon  the 
very  problem  over  which  he  labored  in  vain  ;  have 
tried  to  demonstrate  the  solution  of  the  universe 
in  terms  of  matter,  and,  ignoring  mind,  have  en- 
deavored to  account  for  being.  It  was  to  this  that 
Locke,  Hume,  and  afterwards  the  Mills,  by  meth- 
ods peculiar  to  each,  brought  the  wealth  of  their 
geniuses.  Taken  up  in  our  own  times  by  men  like 
Spencer,  Bain  and  others,  with  arguments  drawn 
purely  from  the  physiological  field,  the  popular 
philosophy  of  to-day  has  come  to  be  decidedly 
materialistic  in  its  character.  And  so,  while  many 
have  given  themselves  no  concern  as  to  the  method 
by  which  these  conclusions  have  been  reached,  or 
even  asked  whether  they  have  been  legitimately 
or  illegitimately  drawn  from  the  facts,  or  indeed 
whether  by  such  methods  the  facts  themselves  are 
to  be  at  all  explained,  yet  accept  without  further 
question  the  conclusions  arrived  at,  and  make  such 
the  basis  of  their  mental  and  moral  life. 

It  is  our  purpose  in  the  present  chapter,  so  far 
as  our  space  will  allow,  to  enter  into  an  adverse 
criticism  of  this  current  philosophy  that  practi- 
cally denies  to  mind  a  place  as  real    being,  and, 


62  MIND. 

instead  of  asking  whether  matter  and  force  cannot 
be  made  to  account  for  all  phenomena,  to  enter 
into  an  inquiry  as  to  whether  by  these  alone  phe- 
nomena can  be  explained  at  all,  and  whether  the 
true  order  is  not  first  mind,  and  then  matter  ;  first 
mind  as  conditioning  and  determining,  then  matter 
as  conditioned  and  determined.  It  will  be  appar- 
ent at  a  glance,  that  this  problem  is  most  inti- 
mately connected  with  the  one  that  we  attempted 
to  solve  in  the  previous  chapter.  Our  aim  there 
was  to  show  that  force  was  not  to  be  traced  to 
a  material  origin,  but  rather  to  a  mental. 

But  what  if,  in  the  language  of  the  current 
philosophy,  mind  itself  is  but  matter  t  What  if 
thought  be  but  the  product  of  the  fibers  and  cells 
of  the  brain — a  mere  secretion,  and  nothing  more  ? 
If  this  be  true,  if  mind  be  nothing  more  than  mat- 
ter in  some  one  of  its  forms,  then  must  our  posi- 
tion in  regard  to  the  beginning  of  force  be  aban- 
doned, and  all  search  for  its  origin  becomes  futile. 
Nor  is  this  all  ;  ignore  mind  as  separate  being  by 
merging  it  into  matter,  and  you  have  destroyed 
the  possibility  of  all  knowledge.  Man  is  nothing, 
then,  but  an  indefinite  quantity  upon  which  impres 
sions  may  be  made,  but  which  to  him  have  no  more 


MINI).  63 

meaning  than  the  image  has  to  the  mirror  upon 
which  it  falls.  It  becomes,  therefore,  a  question  of 
vital  importance  whether  this  gospel  of  matter,  so 
characteristic  of  our  times,  has  its  foundation  in 
fact,  and  whether  matter  is  in  reality  all.  We  shall 
therefore  enter  into  our  present  inquiry  not  alone 
in  the  interest  of  the  view  expressed  in  relation  to 
force,  but  in  the  interest  at  once  of  morality, 
religion,  philosophy,  and,  indeed,  of  every  vital 
question  with  which  we  as  men  are  to  be  con- 
cerned. 

Our  first  task  must  be  to  ascertain  the  precise 
position  at  present  held  by  the  more  advanced 
materialists.  Their  fundamental  principle  is,  that 
nothing  exists  at  all  but  matter. 

That  which  we  call  mind  is  nothing  but  a  func- 
tion of  the  body  ;  a  necessary  product  of  sensuous 
perception  and  the  nutritive  matter  absorbed  by 
us,  but  pre-eminently  a  product  of  the  action  of 
the  cerebral  portions  of  the  brain.  Alind  is  a  pro- 
duct of  the  brain-development,  just  as  the  secre- 
tions are  the  product  of  the  glands.  Thought,  in 
the  language  of  IVIoleschott,  consists  in  the  motion 
of  matter;  it  is  a  translocation  of  the  cerebral 
substance  ;   without  phosphorus,  there  can  be  no 


64  MIND. 

thought,  and  consciousness  itself  is  nothing  but  an 
attribute  of  matter.  Man,  says  Czolbe,  is  nothing 
more  than  a  mosaic  figure,  made  up  of  different 
atoms  and  mechanically  combined  in  an  elaborate 
shape.  As  heat  and  light  are  but  modes  of  mo- 
tion, so  also  is  nervous  activity.  And  if  nervous 
activity  is  but  matter  in  motion,  so  also  is  vital 
energy ;  and  if  vital  energy  is  but  matter,  so  also 
are  mental  judgments,  so  also  is  mind  itself.  It 
comes,  therefore,  to  this:  that  all  mental  operations 
are  but  manifestations  or  expressions  of  material 
changes  in  the  brain  ;  that  man  is  but  a  thinking 
machine,  his  mental  life  entirely  determined  for 
him  by  conditions  over  which  he  has  no  control. 
That  this  is  what  we  are  to  understand  as  the  posi- 
tion of  materialists,  is  expressed  in  no  uncertain 
terms  in  the  correspondence  between  H.  G.  Atkin- 
son and  Harriet  Martineau,  in  which  are  to  be 
found  sentences  like  the  following:  ''Instinct, 
passion,  thought,  are  effects  of  organic  substances." 
"All  causes  are  material  causes;  in  material  condi- 
tions I  find  the  origin  of  all  religions,  all  philoso- 
phies, all  opinions,  all  virtues,  all  spiritual  conditions 
and  influences,  in  the  same  manner  that  I  find  the 
origin  of  all  diseases  and  of  all  insanities  in   mate- 


MIND.  65 

rial  conditions  and  causes.  I  am  what  I  am  —  a 
creature  of  circumstances  ;  I  claim  neither  merit 
nor  demerit."  "  I  feel  that  I  am  as  completely  the 
result  of  my  nature  and  impelled  to  do  what  I  do, 
as  the  needle  to  point  to  the  pole  or  the  puppet 
to  move  according  as  the  string  is  pulled." 

From  these  utterances  it  must  be  apparent  that 
mental  actions  can  be  nothing  more  than  the 
activity  of  matter  ;  that  mind  itself  is  but  matter 
conditioned  and  determined  by  its  environment. 
To  speak,  therefore,  of  mind,  is  to  speak  of  that 
which  is  not ;  matter  is  all. 

Now  before  we  go  on  we  must  stop  to  see  out 
of  what  this  materialistic  conception  of  man  has 
come.  For  in  making  up  our  estimate  of  any  sys- 
tem we  will  always  be  aided  by  an  inquiry  into  its 
history.  If,  from  any  reason,  whether  of  prejudice 
or  other  cause,  a  full  view  of  the  field  to  be  trav- 
ersed has  not  been  had,  we  may  at  once  suspect 
that  in  the  system  there  will  appear  some  essential 
defect,  which  must  nullify  it  as  a  true  interpreta- 
tion of  that  which  it  attempts  to  explain.  In 
looking,  therefore,  into  the  history  of  this  concep- 
tion, we  shall  find  its  error  to  consist  in  a  one- 
sided study  of  man  ;  a  study  of  hmi  purely  from 
the  physiological  side. 


66  MIND. 

Its  advocates  are  men  eminent  in  the  various 
departments  of  physical  science.  Men  who  have 
looked  profoundly  into  nature,  studied  out  her 
laws  and  methods,  but  who,  according  to  their 
own  acknowledgments,  have  given  themselves  no 
concern  in  regard  to  psychology.  The  dogma  of 
evolution  has  taught  them  to  regard  man  but  as  a 
higher  order  of  the  brute,  and  as  such  he  must  be 
experimented  on,  dissected,  studied  by  the  same 
methods.  The  microscope,  the  scalpel  and  the 
electrode  are  applied.  Nerves  are  traced  to  their 
supposed  centres,  back  again  to  the  muscles  ;  the 
electrode  is  applied  ;  certain  parts  of  the  brain  are 
touched,  and  certain  motions  follow.  Hence  it  is 
assumed  that  nervous  activity,  like  electricity,  is 
but  a  mode  of  motion  ;  stands,  therefore,  in  correla- 
tion with  other  forces,  and  other  modes  of  force 
may  be  changed  into  it.  The  conclusion  thus  has 
been  arrived  at,  that  if  nervous  activity  is  but  a 
mode  of  motion,  similar  in  every  particular  to  any 
other  mode,  and  governed  by  precisely  the  same 
laws,  then,  too,  is  vital  energy  ;  and  if  vital  energy 
is  but  material,  why,  then,  are  not  all  mental  phe- 
nomena—  why  not  mind  } 

And  thus  for  half  a  century  men  have  been   giv- 


MIND.  67 

ing  their  attention  to  the  study  of  brain  tissue,  in 
the  hope  of  discovering  the  hidden  connection 
between  these  tissues  and  thought,  and  of  laying 
open  the  mysterious  processes  whereby  the  nutri- 
ent matter  taken  out  of  food  may  be  transformed 
into  energy,  and  this  energy  again  transformed 
into  thought.  Without  getting  beyond  matter, 
they  have  attempted  to  solve  the  problem  of  mind. 
Well,  now,  with  this  history  back  of  it,  and  in 
pursuance  of  these  methods,  materialism  has  come, 
bearing  the  marks  of  its  one-sided  process.  Out 
of  such  a  history,  such  and  only  such  a  philoso- 
phy could  come  ;  a  philosophy  dwarfed,  half-devel- 
oped, uncomprehensive.  We  have  directed  atten- 
tion to  the  history  and  to  the  method,  because 
thereby  the  system  is  explained  as  to  its  one-sided- 
ness.  Carlyle  once  said  that,  "  It  is  not  honest 
inquiry  that  makes  anarchy,  but  it  is  error,  insin- 
cerity and  half-truths  that  make  it."  It  is  so  with 
philosophy.  To  be  a  true  system  it  must  take 
into  account  all  the  facts,  deal  honestly  with  them, 
and  explain  them  if  possible;  otherwise  it  becomes 
intolerant  and  altogether  inadequate.  Just  as  the 
idealism  of  Berkeley,  which  sought  to  explain  all 
beins:  in  terms   of    mind,   broke  down   because  it 


68  MIND. 

failed  to  be  comprehensive  in  that  it  did  not  ac- 
count for  phenomena  without  us,  so  must  this  also 
be  ruled  out  on  the  ground  that  it  does  not  explain 
that  which  is  within,  or,  if  you  please,  because  it 
fails  to  be  comprehensive. 

Mind  is  ;  matter  is.  Each  is  to  be  accounted 
for ;  neither  is  to  be  ignored  nor  explained  in  like 
terms  with  the  other ;  both  are  revealed  in  con- 
sciousness, and  as  objects  of  consciousness  are  to 
be  explained. 

But  before  we  go  on  to  a  criticism  of  this  sys- 
tem, let  us  see  precisely  what  we  have  to  do.  It 
affirms  that  nothing  is  but  matter  and  its  forces ; 
that  all  phenomena  are  to  be  accounted  for  as 
being  the  result  of  the  operation  of  these  two 
factors.  We  have,  therefore,  to  show  that  mere 
matter  and  force  cannot  be  made  to  account  for 
the  facts  as  they  exist,  and  that  no  explanation 
but  that  which  gives  to  mind  a  place  distinct  from 
matter  and  as  determining  matter,  can  explain 
phenomena  as  they  appear,  or  the  facts  of  con- 
sciousness as  they  exist,  for  it  must  not  be  over- 
looked that  the  facts  of  our  inner  experience  are 
as  real  as  the  facts  revealed  in  Tnc  sense,  and  that 
mental  phenomena  are  as  real  as  material. 


MIND.  69 

In  determining,  therefore,  the  validity  of  mate- 
rialism, let  us  consider  three  propositions  : 

First,  if  matter  alone  is,  diversity  in  human 
thought  and  action,  the  physical  antecedents  re- 
maining the  same,  cannot  be  explained. 

Second,  if  mind  is  matter  and  not  an  existence 
in  itself,  then  is  there  nothing  to  which  phenomena 
can  appear,  and  phenomena  cannot  be  interpreted. 

Third,  if  mind  exists  not  apart  from  matter  and 
as  undetermined  by  matter,  the  new  in  art,  litera- 
ture or  invention  could  not  be.  Take,  now,  the 
first  proposition  : 

If  matter  alone  is,  diversity  in  human  thought 
and  action,  the  physical  antecedents  remaining  the 
same,  cannot  be  explained.  If  there  is  any  one 
fact  that  the  study  of  matter  and  force  has  con- 
firmed more  than  another,  it  is  the  immutability 
of  their  operations.  Certain  antecedents  always 
precede  certain  consequents,  and  like  effects  in- 
variably follow  like  causes.  It  is  the  persuasion 
that  Nature  is  invariable  in  her  operations,  that 
makes  a  science  of  nature  possible.  If  Nature 
were  variable,  if  certain  antecedents  with  unvary- 
ing certainty  did  not  precede  certain  consequents, 
no  man  could  know  Nature  or  formulate  her  laws. 


70  MIND. 

The  sun  rises  to-day  at  his  appointed  place  and 
time.  The  moon  nightly  drives  her  chariot  through 
the  sky  along  the  same  route  she  has  journeyed 
since  the  morning  of  creation.  Indeed,  so  unvary- 
ing is  this  uniformity  that  the  very  moment  of  her 
passage  across  the  sun's  disk  may  be  foretold, 
the  path  of  her  shadow  determined  ;  and  when 
the  predicted  moment  comes,  she  has  reached 
her  appointed  place  in  the  heavens  and  proceeds 
to  drag  her  train  of  darkness  over  continents  and 
seas  in  the  fulfillment  of  her  promise. 

The  seasons,  in  obedience  to  well-determined 
laws,  come  and  go.  Day  follows  night,  and  night 
the  day,  while  creation  sings  the  same  song  she 
sang  when  the  sons  of  God  shouted  for  joy,  and 
the  morning  stars  first  sang  together.  Take  the 
principle  of  uniformity  out  of  nature,  and  astron- 
omy as  a  science  could  not  exist.  The  same  is  true 
of  chemistry.  The  chemist  knows  that  two  elements 
subject  to  the  same  conditions  will  always  unite 
with  like  result  ;  that  certain  causes  always  pro- 
duce certain  effects  and  no  other,  and  that,  given 
the  cause,  the  effect  is  the  same  yesterday,  to-day 
and  forever.  ]^ut  rob  the  elements  with  wliich 
the  chemist  deals  of  this  })rinciplc,  of  uniformity  in 


MIND.  7 1 

action,  and  chemistry  as  a  science  could  not  be. 
The  union  of  two  elements  to-day  would  produce 
heat,  to-morrow  cold  ;  two  other  elements  in  union 
to-day  would  produce  a  liquid,  to-morrow  a  solid. 
As  much  may  be  said  of  Nature  in  whatever  de- 
partment she  is  investigated.  If  Science  is,  it  is 
because  Nature  is  uniform  ;  because  matter  and 
force  always  act  in  certain  ways,  and  can  act  in  no 
other.  But  come  now  to  man.  In  him,  according 
to  the  dictum  of  materialism,  nothing  exists  but 
force  and  matter,  acting  as  they  act  elsewhere  in 
the  universe.  But  man  is  not  uniform.  Thoughts 
and  acts  are  not  uniform.  Who  can  predict,  if  the 
antecedents  be  given,  what  the  thought  or  the  act 
may  be  ?  Having  once  determined  how  a  man  will 
act  under  certain  circumstances  and  conditions,  no 
one  can  say  that  under  precisely  the  same  con- 
ditions he  will  act  as  he  did  before.  Indeed,  so 
variable  is  human  action,  under  circumstances  pre- 
cisely identical,  that  the  phrase,  "  The  unex- 
pected is  what  always  happens,"  has  passed  into  a 
proverb. 

Now  this  lack  of  uniformity,  the  various  courses 
pursued  by  different  individuals,  and,  indeed,  by 
the  same  individual  under  circumstances  precisely 


72  MIND. 

similar  in  character,  cannot  be  explained  if  in  man 
nothing  exists  but  matter,  and  mind  the  product 
of  matter  is  determined  and  conditioned  by 
physical  antecedents.  There  must,  then,  be  uni- 
formity in  human  actions  ;  and  the  course  that 
any  one  will  pursue  under  given  circumstances 
may  be  predicted  with  the  same  certainty  that 
effects  in  the  material  world  may  be  predicted 
when  the  antecedents  are  known.  But  that  course 
cannot  be  predicted.  And  the  only  satisfactory 
explanation  of  this  lack  of  uniformity  in  human 
action  is  found  in  the  admission  that  in  man  there 
resides  that  which  is  undetermined  and  uncon- 
ditioned :  something  that  determines  a  course  of 
action  purely  out  of  itself,  and  that  recognizes  no 
conditions  but  those  of  its  own  being.  Moreover, 
in  all  our  attempts  to  influence  or  to  determine 
beforehand  a  course  of  action  for  our  fellow  men, 
we  recognize  the  truth  that  they  have  power  to 
overstep  all  physical  antecedents,  and  are  able  to 
act  as  though  such  antecedents  were  not  existing. 
And  thus,  instead  of  bringing  physical  causes  alone 
to  bear,  instead,  for  instance,  of  studying  the  in- 
fluence of  air  and  diet  and  the  like,  we  aim  to 
determine  the  action,  not  by  the  })hysical,  but  by 


MIND.  73 

bringing  into  operation  influences  as  far  removed 
from  the  physical  as  can  well  be. 

And  thus  do  we  recognize  that  the  controlling 
factors  in  human  action  are  not  matter  and  force, 
but  that  which  has  power  to  determine  even  these. 
And  that  in  man  not  matter,  but  mind,  is  the 
controlling  factor  ;  that  motives  are  stronger  than 
material  forces,  and  that  these  determine  for  us  a 
course  of  action  m  the  very  face  of  all  physical 
antecedents.  This  is  the  method  of  all  civili- 
zation and  reform.  Not  the  determining  of  mind 
through  matter  or  material  conditions,  but  the 
determining  of  material  conditions  through  and  by 
means  of  mind. 

And  then,  again,  if  there  be  nothing  of  us  but 
matter  under  control  of  the  same  laws  that  govern 
matter  in  the  world  without  us,  it  follows  not  only 
that  actions  with  certain  antecedents  must  be  uni- 
form—  the  same  physical  cause  always  producing 
the  same  effects  in  thought  and  action  —  but  also 
that  such  effects  must  follow  immediately  on  the 
cause.  There  could  never  be  such  a  thing  as 
deferred  action.  It  is  because  effects  follow  imme- 
diately on  the  presence  of  the  cause,  that  we  are 
able  to  affirm  their  connection  or  trace  any  certain 
effect  to  a  certain  definite  cause. 


74  MIND. 

If  the  two  phenomena  did  not  co-exist,  no  man 
could  affirm  of  a  certain  effect  that  it  sprang  from 
a  certain  cause.  It  is  the  close  relationship  in 
time  of  the  two  phenomena  of  cause  and  effect 
that  enables  us  to  affirm  their  connection.  The 
moment  the  bolt  leaps  from  the  cloud,  the  tree  is 
shivered  into  fragments.  The  moment  the  elec- 
tric current  touches  the  steel,  it  becomes  magne- 
tized. The  moment  I  touch,  inadvertently,  a 
heated  surface,  the  nerves  concerned  in  automatic 
action  cause  the  proper  muscles  to  contract,  and 
my  hand  is  withdrawn.  And  thus  it  is  wherever 
matter  and  force  alone  enter  as  factors.  Well, 
now,  grant  that  thoughts,  granl:  that  actions  are 
effects  of  material  changes  in  the  substance  of  the 
brain,  and  that  when  these  changes  take  place 
the  thought  and  the  act  follow  as  the  necessary 
effect  of  such  change,  and  how,  then,  are  you  to 
explain  deferred  action  }  How  are  you  to  explain 
the  fact  that  to-day  you  may  determine  to  do  a 
certain  thing,  and  yet  say  to  yourself,  "■  I  will  not 
do  this  thing  to-day,  I  will  wait  until  to-morrow  "  } 
How  account  for  the  fact  that  you  may  even 
appoint  an  hour,  and  say,  '*  I  will  do  it  then  "  } 
By  that  time  other  changes  have  taken  place  in 


MIND.  75 

the  brain  structure  which,  on  this  principle,  would 
impel  you  to  do  the  very  opposite  of  that  upon 
which  you  had  determined.  But  yet,  faithful  to 
your  determination,  you  do  precisely  the  thing 
that  you  determined  to  do,  and  at  the  precise 
moment  appointed.  Now,  we  insist  upon  it  that 
this  could  not  be,  if  action  and  thought  were 
caused  and  determined  alone  by  changes  in  the 
brain  structure,  and  followed  as  the  necessary 
effect  of  such  changes.  If  that  were  the  case,  the 
effect  would  be  immediate,  if  at  all,  and  we  could 
no  more  defer  the  action  than  we  can  defer  the 
effect  of  the  lightning,  or  hold  back  for  a  defi- 
nite period,  the  explosion  of  the  projectile  from 
the  cannon  after  the  powder  has  been  exploded. 
It  is  therefore  evident  that  if  we  would  consist- 
ently explain  the  facts,  we  must  go  beyond  matter 
and  force  ;  in  short,  must  acknowledge  the  presence 
and  potency  in  man  of  that  which  is  above  matter, 
and  undetermined  by  it.  If  actions,  the  physical 
antecedents  of  which  are  the  same,  may  be  diverse, 
and  if  the  outgrowing  of  such  action  may  be  de- 
ferred, it  follow^s  that  the  cause  of  such  action  lies 
not-  in  matter,  but  in  that  which  is  above  matter 
and  independent  of  it  —  that  is  in  mind. 


76  MIND. 

But  come  now  to  the  second  proposition  :  If 
mind  is  matter,  and  not  an  existence  in  itself,  then 
is  there  nothing  to  which  phenomena  can  appear, 
and  phenomena  cannot  be  interpreted. 

It  was  because  the  truth  involved  in  this  propo- 
sition was  overlooked  by  Locke,  that  his  system 
went  asunder.  The  same  truth  is  alike  fatal  to 
all  sensuous  philosophy.  In  every  such  system 
the  fact  is  overlooked  that  it  is  mind  that  makes 
phenomena  possible,  and  that  until  you  have  mind, 
you  cannot  have  a  phenomenal  world.  And  yet 
men  who  advocate  a  purely  sensuous  philosophy 
are  fond  of  talking  of  impressions  and  appear- 
ances. They  speak  of  mind  as  **a  sheet  of  blank 
paper  "  ;  '*  a  clean  tablet  on  which  impressions  are 
made  by  the  sense."  But  the  significant  truth  is 
overlooked,  that  when  impressions  are  made  on 
the  paper  or  tablet  they  remain  as  simple  impres- 
sions :  they  do  not  come  to  be  ideas  ;  they  never 
become  knowledge.  In  man  impressions  become 
more  than  impressions  :  they  become  ideas  ;  in 
reflection  united  in  one  idea  of  substance,  they 
become  knowledge. 

To  the  mind,  impressions  arc  not  what  they  are 
to  the  tablet  ;  the  same  is  true  of  all   phenomena. 


MIND.  'J'l 

Before  appearances  can  appear,  there  must  be 
that  to  which  they  appear.  We  say  phenomena 
appear.  Very  well  ;  but  to  what  do  appearances 
appear  }  The  reply  must  be,  "  They  appear  to  the 
mind."  But  remember,  now,  that  mind,  according 
to  this  system,  is  matter,  and  matter  is  phenomena. 
Can  phenomena  appear  to  phenomena }  and  if 
so,  how  are  we  to  explain  the  fact  that  fleeting 
impressions  are  constructed,  put  together  in  an 
idea  of  substance  and  thus  become  knowledge  ? 
Knowledge  is  not  appearance  ;  knowledge  is  not 
phenomena.  Impressions  may  be  made  on  a 
sensitive  medium  as  they  are  on  the  sensorium. 
Images  may  be  formed  on  the  mirror  as  they 
are  on  the  human  retina,  but  there  they  remain  ; 
they  never  become  more  than  impressions.  The 
mirror  cannot  know  the  object  that  appears  ;  the 
sensitive  medium  cannot  interpret  the  impression, 
and,  in  either  case,  knowledge  as  such  cannot  be. 
And  why  .'*  The  answer  is,  These  are  mere  mat- 
ter, because  back  of  the  impression  there  is  noth- 
ing to  interpret  the  impression  ;  nothing  that  has 
power  to  get  out  of  fleeting  impressions  knowledge. 
There  is  nothing  to  which  appearances  appear.  It 
is  not  so  in  man.     Back  of  the  appearance  stands 


78  MIND. 

that  to  which  appearances  appear.  In  him  there 
is  that  which  has  power  to  reflect  upon  the  impres- 
sions as  given  in  the  sense,  that  looks  upon  the 
image  as  formed  upon  the  retina,  that  interprets 
impression  and  image,  and  gets  out  of  them 
knowledge.  What,  then,  is  this  something  back 
of  phenomena  that  looks  upon  and  interprets 
them  ?  Matter  it  cannot  be.  Mind,  apart  from 
matter,  it  must  be.  Remove  mind  and  you  have 
nothing  left  to  which  phenomena  can  appear,  for 
it  is  by  mind  that  phenomena  are  made  possible, 
and  until  you  have  mind  as  existence,  apart  from 
matter,  you  cannot  have  a  phenomenal  world. 
And  if  even  such  a  world  could  be,  it  could  not 
possibly  be  known  or  understood  by  us. 

But  again  :  it  is  alone  as  mind  stands  apart  from 
matter  and  as  unconditioned  by  it,  that  the  new 
in  art,  literature  or  invention  becomes  possible. 
On  no  other  condition  is  the  new  possible.  Other- 
wise, to  know  one  individual  of  a  race  or  a  country 
would  be  to  know  all.  To  know  what  man  has 
wrought  and  been  would  be  to  know  what  he  may 
do  and  be  throughout  all  ages.  See  how  this  is. 
The  product  of  mere  material  agencies  is  unvari- 
ablc  ;  the  characteristic  foliage  of  the  tree  is  ever 


MIND.  79 

the  same  ;  the  flower  of  the  individual  plant  in 
a  state  of  nature  is  from  year  to  year  the  same. 
This  holds  whenever  mere  matter  and  force  are 
the  factors  in  the  problem,  and  in  that  case  we 
look  in  vain  for  the  new.  The  principles  of  cor- 
relation and  conservation  of  forces  in  the  mate- 
rial world  required  that  no  new  force  shall  come 
into  action.  But  put  this  law  relating  to  force 
side  by  side  with  that  principle  upon  which  all 
science  rests,  and  without  which  no  science  could 
be,  namely,  that  forces  act,  and  must  act  as  they 
have  always  acted  hitherto,  and  what  have  you  } 
This:  that  nothing  new  can  come.  Remember, 
now,  that  thought,  according  to  the  theory  which 
we  are  discussing,  and  mind  out  of  which  thought 
comes,  are  but  matter  and  force  operating  as  they 
have  always  operated,  and  I  ask.  How  are  you  to 
interpret  a  Milton  or  a  Shakespeare  in  literature, 
a  Locke  or  a  Kant  in  philosophy,  a  Raphael  or  a 
Michael  Angelo  in  art,  a  Mozart  in  music,  or  a 
Fulton  in  invention  .''  Ignore  mind,  explain  it  as 
the  product  of  matter,  determined  and  conditioned 
by  material  antecedents,  and  you  have  left  no  room 
for  progress  in  history,  for  genius  in  art,  literature 
or  invention.     The  new  cannot  be,  and  along  the 


8o  MIND. 

groove,  worn  by  the  march  of  ages,  humanity  must 
continue  to  journey  forever. 

And  so  you  see  it  comes  to  this  :  tested  by 
those  tests  by  which  every  system  of  philosophy 
must  be  tested,  materiaUsm  is  found  wanting.  The 
first  requirement  of  a  true  philosophy  is  that  it  be 
comprehensive.  It  must  explain  more  than  a  few 
facts.  It  must  be  encyclopaedic  ;  must  take  into 
account  the  circle  of  experience  —  must  explain  all 
that  is.  In  short,  it  must  explain  being  ;  and  if  it 
fails  in  this  it  lacks  comprehensiveness,  and,  lacking 
this,  must  be  cast  aside  as  empty,  false,  and  utterly 
inadequate  as  a  system.  Materialism  may  be  able 
to  explain  man  on  the  side  on  which  he  finds  him- 
self linked  to  the  brute  ;  but  on  the  side  by  virtue 
of  which  he  is  truly  man,  and  through  which 
matter  in  him  is  transfigured  and  glorified,  for 
that  side  materialism  is  unable  to  account.  No 
philosophy  that  denies  to  mind  a  place  as  real 
and  essential  being,  undetermined  and  apart  from 
matter,  can  explain  the  facts  as  they  are  or  the 
universe  as  it  exists.  But,  it  will  be  asked,  is  mind 
then,  absolutely  undetermined,  and  do  not  mental 
consequents  follow  physical  antecedents  in  such  a 
relation  as  that  it  may  be  affirmed  that  thoughts 


MIND.  8 1 

are  determined  by  material  impressions  ?  Is  it 
not  true  that  impressions  given  in  the  sense  are 
taken  up  by  the  mind  and  woven  by  a  process 
of  reflection  into  ideas  ;  and  is  there  not  such  a 
necessary  connection  between  the  material  impres- 
sion and  the  mental  idea  as  that  it  must  be  said 
that  the  idea  is  determined  by  the  impression  ? 
The  answer  is  this  :  Whether  the  idea  shall  be 
determined  by  the  impression  alone,  depends  upon 
the  mind  itself.  It  goes  without  saying,  that  one 
and  the  same  material  impression  excites  different 
thoughts  even  in  the  same  individual,  to  say  noth- 
ing of  the  thoughts  that  such  an  impression  may 
arouse  in  different  persons.  Similar  sounds  can- 
not be  said  to  produce  similar  thoughts,  or  similar 
impressions  produce  similar  ideas.  The  mind  may 
occupy  itself  with  phenomena,  may  even  so  far 
lose  itself  as  to  seldom  rise  above  the  merely 
sensuous ;  but  when  this  is  the  case,  it  is  by  its 
own  consent,  and  not  from  necessity.  From  all 
determination  by  the  material  it  has  power  to 
separate  itself  and  to  say  "■  By  these  I  shall  not 
be  determined."  It  may  shut  itself  up  within 
itself,  and  in  its  operations  shut  out  all  impres- 
sions from  without  and  dwell  on  the  purely  ideal, 


82  MIND. 

the  transcendental.  So,  while  a  clear  and  some- 
times an  intimate  connection  may  appear  to  exist 
between  physical  antecedents  and  mental  conse- 
quents, that  connection  is  one,  the  influence  of 
which,  and  the  determining  power  of  which,  is,  at 
least  in  the  normal  state,  marked  and  limited  by 
the  mind's  own  choice,  and  is  not  a  relation  of 
necessity.  But  between  these  two  conceptions 
there  is  the  widest  difference.  If  that  relation  is 
one  of  necessity,  then  is  mind  absolutely  deter- 
mined by  matter  ;  is,  indeed,  lost  in  matter.  But 
if  the  relation  is  one  of  choice,  as  we  have  just 
shown,  then  mind  may  or  may  not  be  deter- 
mined, according  as  it  chooses  ;  and  is  therefore 
left  supreme,  self-existent,  self-determined. 

But  what  even  if  thought  in  the  lower  fields  of 
its  operations  is  sometimes  influenced  by  material 
impressions  }  Is  mind  then  to  be  declared  deter- 
mined ?  Thought  is  one  thing,  mind  is  another. 
Thought  is  an  emanation  ;  mind  is  the  something 
that  stands  back  ;  the  something  out  of  which  the 
thought  emanates.  The  thought  is  evanescent  ; 
the  mind  is  permanent.  It  is  that  which  stands 
back  of  the  thought,  brings  thought  into  being, 
sits  in  judgment  on  it,  and  hence  exists  apart 
from  it. 


MIND.  83 

And  so  it  comes  that  no  system  that  ignores 
mind  as  being  m  itself,  no  system  that  aims  to 
mterpret  the  imiverse  as  it  is,  on  the  supposition 
that  mind  is  conditioned  or  determined  by  matter, 
can  lay  claim  to  being  a  true  philosophy.  Every 
such  system  when  practically  applied  can  neither 
be  made  to  explain  the  world  without  nor  the  world 
within  us.  Even  in  the  writings  of  those  who  have 
been  loudest  in  the  defense  of  such  systems,  there 
is  well-nigh  universally  to  be  found  a  manifest  dis- 
trust of  the  doctrine.  Few  have  defended  it  more 
stoutly  than  John  Stuart  Mill.  But  when  he  found 
himself  face  to  face  with  its  logical  outcome,  when 
he  perceived  that  by  it  man  became  but  a  puppet, 
an  automaton,  he  practically  denied  the  very  prin- 
ciples on  which  his  entire  system  rested.  Open 
his  autobiography  and  read  what  he  there  says  : 
*'  I  felt  as  if  I  were  scientifically  proved  to  be  the 
helpless  slave  of  antecedent  circumstances  ;  as  if 
my  character  and  that  of  all  others  had  been  formed 
for  us  by  agencies  beyond  our  control  and  was  wholly 
out  of  our  power."  A  little  further  on  you  have 
this  :  "  I  saw  that  though  our  character  is  formed  by 
circumstances,  our  own  desires  can  do  much  to 
shape   those    circumstances.     That  we  have    real 


84  MIND. 

power  over  the  formation  of  our  own  characters." 
Now  let  me  ask  you  not  to  overlook  the  fact  that 
that  last  phrase  is  fatal  to  all  that  Mill  had  ever 
said  in  defense  of  his  system.  If  man  has  power 
over  the  formation  of  his  own  character,  as  he 
admits,  then  it  is  manifest  that  that  power  can 
come  not  out  of  matter,  but  out  of  mind,  indepen- 
dent, uncontrolled  and  undetermined  by  matter. 
Well,  now,  seeing  that  the  order  of  the  materialist, 
in  which  matter  is  put  first,  and  then  mind,  cannot 
be  the  true  order,  we  have  a  right  to  ask  whether 
the  real  order  is  not  directly  the  reverse,  and 
whether  it  be  not  first  mind  and  then  matter. 
First  mind  as  unconditioned,  then  matter  as  con- 
ditioned and  controlled  by  it.  If  we  were  per- 
mitted to  get  an  answer  from  the  metaphysician, 
it  would  be  unqualifiedly  in  the  affirmative. 

To  the  mind  that  has  dealt  fairly  with  the  prob- 
lem it  is  no  longer  a  question  whether  mind 
determines  matter.  It  was  long  ago  seen  that 
without  mind  nature  could  not  be  ;  and  that  until 
you  have  mind  you  cannot  have  nature.  It  was  a 
saying  of  Kant's,  that  mind  makes  nature.  By  this 
he  meant  that,  looking  out  on  the  universe,  you 
have  nothing  but  a  disconnected  crowd  of  impres- 


MIND.  8 


sions  and  ideas  ;  a  cosmic  mass,  but  no  cosmos. 
And  that  until  thought  comes  in  and  determines 
every  object  in  its  relations,  nature  could  not  be. 
From  this  we  might  go  on,  and,  in  the  name  of  a 
true  philosophy,  affirm  that  that  which  conditions 
is  before  that  which  is  conditioned.  That  if  mind 
is,  as  it  must  be,  the  primary  element  in  knowl- 
edge, it  must  also  be  the  primary  element  in  the 
universe.  For  if  thought  is  prior  in  knowledge,  it 
must  be  prior  in  being.  But  we  are  aware  that 
against  this  method  of  reasoning,  the  charge  that 
we  brought  against  a  purely  physiological  study 
of  man  has  also  been  urged.  It  has  been  urged 
that  if  it  is  unfair  to  look  at  man  purely  from 
the  physiological  side,  it  is  likewise  unfair  to  study 
him  from  the  psychological.  And  yet  that  ob- 
jection cannot  in  the  present  case  stand  ;  for  we 
are  investigating  not  the  physical,  but  the  mental 
in  man,  and  are  aiming  to  determine  whether  this 
that  we  call  the  mental  can  be  explained  in  terms 
of  matter  and  force.  So  far  as  man  is  material,  he 
is  to  be  studied  by  the  physical  method  ;  on  this 
side  he  may  be  investigated  as  nature  is  investi- 
gated. But  man  has  other  than  material  ;  he  has 
also  mental  being,  and  as  the  nature  philosopher 


86  MIND. 

may,  with  justice,  insist  that  so  far  as  the  material 
in  man  is  concerned,  he  be  investigated  by  physical 
methods,  on  the  other  hand,  with  equal  justice, 
we  may  demand  that  man  as  mental  shall  be 
studied,  not  by  the  physical,  but  by  the  trans- 
cendental method.  And  when  so  investigated,  the 
conclusion  can  only  be  that  at  which  the  transcen- 
dental thinkers  of  Germany  long  since  arrived, 
when  they  put  thought  as  the  primary  element  in 
the  universe,  and  reasoned  that  if  thought  be  prior 
in  knowledge,  it  must  be  prior  in  being  ;  and  that 
by  mind  nature  is  determined. 

But  the  same  conclusion  to  which  the  transcen- 
dental thinkers  came  may  also  be  reached  by 
another  method.  And  while  the  materialist,  on 
account  of  the  intimate  relation  sometimes  found 
to  exist  between  physical  and  mental  states,  rea- 
sons that  the  mental  is  determined  by  the  physical, 
it  will  be  found  nearer  to  the  truth  to  say,  when 
such  connection  is  observed  to  exist,  that  the 
physical  has  been  determined  by  the  mental,  and 
that,  instead  of  mind  being  determined  by  matter, 
in  all  of  those  cases  in  which  mind  is  at  all  con- 
cerned, the  reverse  is  true,  and  matter  is  deter- 
mined by  mind.      If  mind  and  matter  are,  if  they 


MIND.  87 

each  have  an  existence,  and  stand  in  relation,  as 
they  certainly  do  in  man,  then  must  there  be  some 
point  at  which  they  may  be  said  to  touch,  and  the 
influence  projected  upward  into  the  realm  of  mind 
from  the  material  side,  or  downward  into  the  realm 
of  the  material  from  the  mental  side. 

Among  physiologists,  it  has  come  to  be  univer- 
sally recognized  that  the  point  at  which  mind 
touches  matter  in  man  is  located  in  the  brain.  It 
is  maintained  that  in  the  brain  matter  exists  in 
its  most  refined  and  susceptible  state.  That  the 
arrangement  of  its  particles  is  such  as  to  render 
the  brain  susceptible  to  the  most  delicate  impres- 
sions and  influences.  And  while  this  is  affirmed 
on  the  one  hand,  it  is  just  as  stoutly  held  on  the 
other  that  no  action  under  voluntary  control  can 
take  place  expect  as  the  brain  is  in  some  measure 
effected  ;  some  change  effected  on  its  particles,  and 
that  the  act  follows  as  the  direct  and  necessary 
effect  of  such  cerebral  disturbance.  Now  see 
what  we  have  here.  I  move  my  arm.  You  arise 
from  your  chair  and  move  across  the  room.  How 
comes  it  that  these  acts  are  possible  "i  You  are 
to  account  for  them,  says  the  materialist,  as  the 
effects  of  disturbances  in  the  cerebral  substance. 


8S  MIND. 

Certain  particles  of  the  brain  were  affected  or 
disturbed,  and  the  act  followed  as  the  direct  and 
necessary  effect  of  that  disturbance.  But,  I  ask, 
what  caused  the  disturbance,  the  motion  in  these 
particles  of  the  brain  ?  How  came  they  to  move  ? 
When  you  willed  to  move  your  arm,  the  cause  as 
affirmed  lay  in  the  motion  of  brain  particles.  But 
do  you  not  perceive  that  this  motion  in  the  brain 
particles  must  also  have  had  its  cause  ?  On  the 
brain  cells  some  impression  must  have  been 
made.  But  whence  came  that  impression  }  Did 
it  come  from  matter }  If  so,  what  was  it  and  how 
came  it }  There  is  but  one  answer  :  it  came  from 
mind.  An  influence  on  the  cerebral  substance 
there  doubtless  was,  but  it  came  not  from  the 
realm  of  matter.  Out  of  mind  it  came,  and  was 
determined  by  mind.  No  man  can  account  for 
voluntary  action  on  any  other  ground.  To  explain 
it  is  to  admit  that  matter  is  determined  by  mind, 
and  that  the  determining  factor  must  itself  have 
been  undetermined. 

But  the  operation  of  mind  on  matter  has  not 
come  to  its  limit  in  the  narrow  field  of  its  action 
on  the  substance  of  the  brain.  The  horizon  of  its 
operations  has  by  no  means  been  reached  when  it 


MIXD.  89 

has  touched  tlic  liidden  springs  of  action  resident 
in  the  nerve  fibers  and  cells  of  the  brain. 

However  it  may  come,  we  cannot  reason  away 
the  conclusion  that,  insensibly,  the  mind  makes 
the  body  more  and  more  its  organ,  until  at  last  it 
becomes  possible  to  read  the  character  of  the  mind 
that  dwells  within,  by  the  fashion  that  it  has  given 
to  the  countenance,  the  eye,  the  tone  of  voice, 
and  the  general  bearing  of  the  individual.  In  the 
countenance  we  read  the  mind.  When  for  any 
cause  the  mind  chooses  to  occupy  itself  with  the 
low  and  groveling,  it  can  do  so,  but  it  cannot  hide 
the  thought  from  the  close  observer.  As  a  brand 
was  left  on  the  brow  of  Cain,  that  told  of  what  he 
had  done,  so  will  the  degraded  mmd  leave  its  mark 
on  the  temple  of  the  body,  so  that  while  itself  un- 
seen, the  character  of  the  mind  cannot  be  hid,  and 
we  are  able  to  judge  what  it  is,  just  as  certainly  as 
we  judge  the  character  of  the  artisan  when  we  look 
upon  his  handiwork. 

Whatever  objections  may  be  urged  against  physi- 
ognomy, men  still  preserve  their  faith  in  it,  and  no 
individual  can  free  himself  from  the  persuasion 
that  the  countenance  by  and  by  becomes  the 
mirror  of  the  mind.     Well  has  the  question  been 


90  MIND. 

asked  :  ''  If  physiognomy  be  without  truth,  why  do 
the  arts  of  the  painter  and  the  actor  steadfastly  keep 
their  hold  on  mankind,  and  why  are  the  demands  on 
these  not  merely  for  pathognomonic,  but  also  for 
physiognomic  representations  ?  And  how  can  the 
desire  be  explained  which  has  existed  from  the 
earliest  ages,  and  exists  to  the  present  day,  to  see 
any  person  who  has  been  distinguished  in  any 
way  whatever,  for  good  or  evil  ?  A  desire  which 
would  be  altogether  meaningless  without  a  belief 
in  the  correspondence  of  the  external  appearance 
with  the  inner  being." 

We  cannot  but  recognize  the  truth  that  mental 
characteristics  stamp  the  bodily  form  of  man,  and 
that  it  is  not  by  chance  that  a  certain  mind  car- 
ries along  with  it  a  certain  bodily  form  that  is  but 
the  outward  expression  of  itself.  But  we  ask  how 
is  this  to  be  explained  except  on  the  supposition 
that  the  body  is  informed  by  the  indwelling  mind, 
that  it  is  the  mental  that  determines  the  material 
in  something,  at  least,  after  the  same  fashion  that 
the  artist  stamps  himself  unconsciously  on  the 
canvas  that  he  paints  or  the  statue  that  he  chisels  .'* 
In  the  words  of  Mynster :  "  It  must  be  that  the 
mind  appropriates  the  body  to  itself  and  fashions 
it  after  its  own  scheme." 


MIND.  91 

But  let  us  now  reverse  all  this,  and  with  those 
who  deny  to  mind  this  determining  power,  endeavor 
to  account  for  all  these  facts  by  making  them  the 
result  of  physical  forces  and  material  causes,  and 
what  have  we  ?  We  are  then  left  absolutely  with- 
out an  explanation  of  the  facts  of  our  inner  experi- 
ence, and  all  human  achievements,  civilization  and 
progress  in  every  department  go  without  an  ex- 
planation. Take  away  mind  in  its  determining 
power  over  matter,  leave  nothing  but  the  mate- 
rial and  its  forces,  and  you  are  not  only  left  with- 
out an  explanation  of  human  progress,  civilization 
and  achievement,  but  you  have  destroyed  that  in 
virtue  of  which  and  by  which  these  alone  can  be. 

Why  is  not  Greece  the  same  to-day  that  she  was 
in  the  age  of  her  pristine  glory  t  In  the  signifi- 
cant language  of  Fairbain  :  "  The  voices  of  the  gods 
are  heard  in  her  thunders  that  wander  round  the 
brow  of  Olympus  ;  in  the  breezes  that  murmur 
through  the  oaks  of  Dodona  ;  the  names  of  the 
heroes  glorify  and  immortalize  the  places  where 
they  fought  and  fell.  There  shines  on  Ther- 
mopylae and  Salamis,  Morgarten  and  Sempach, 
a  light  that  never  was  on  sea  or  shore,  creative  of 
the  inspiration  of  the  poet's  dreams."     "  Leave  the 


92  MIND. 

physical,  but  change  the  psychical  conditions  and 
the  man  is  changed.  Greece  has  still  her  Ionic 
heavens,  her  laughing  sea,  the  crystal  air  through 
which  her  sons  can  lightly  trip.  But  neither  to 
Greek  nor  Turk  does  the  Periclean  age  return. 
The  occasion  can  never  be  the  cause.  Mind,  not 
matter,  must  explain  the  purpose  and  the  progress 
of  humanity." 

Moreover,  the  history  of  decline  in  the  individual, 
as  well  as  in  the  national  life,  proves  that  the  dis- 
integration is  not  brought  about  by  material  causes. 
The  material  environment  may  remain  precisely 
the  same,  and  the  change  still  go  on.  The  most 
degraded  races,  as  well  as  individuals,  have  lived 
under  the  most  favorable  conditions  of  air,  food 
and  climate,  indeed  under  circumstances  in  which 
every  material  condition  was  calculated  to  bring 
about  the  most  healthful  examples  of  body  and 
soul.  And  so,  on  the  other  hand,  the  grandest 
characters,  the  purest  lives,  the  noblest  in  every 
department  of  the  human  being,  have  come  under 
conditions,  and  in  the  face  of  conditions  the  most 
adverse. 

It  is  not  the  material  in  any  of  its  modes  that 
determines  what  the  individual  or  the  race  shall  be. 


MIND.  93 

But  what  then  does  ?  Open  history  and  you  will 
read  the  secret.  The  origin  of  disintegration 
and  decline  is  to  be  found  in  the  mental,  not  in 
the  material  conditions.  In  a  false  and  corrupt 
philosophy,  in  a  depraved  and  sensuous  thinking 
are  to  be  found  the  antecedents  of  decline.  This 
it  has  been  that  has  entered  like  a  deadly  poison 
into  the  veins  of  the  civil,  social,  and  national  life, 
and  worked  out  the  death  of  the  mighty  empires 
of  the  past.  From  their  origin  to  their  end,  mate- 
rial conditions  remained  the  same.  The  mental 
alone  changed. 

And  so,  too,  has  the  history  of  every  upward 
movement  confirmed  the  truth  that  in  the  eleva- 
tion as  well  as  in  the  degradation  of  men,  the 
problems  to  be  solved  are  not  those  that  have  to 
do  with  the  material,  but  with  the  immaterial,  the 
mental  in  man.  And  so  it  comes  that,  in  man 
and  in  all  that  to  which  man  stands  in  the  relation 
of  cause,  mind,  not  matter,  is  the  determining 
factor. 

But  we  have  now  come  face  to  face  with  an- 
other question.  In  getting  an  answer  to  our  first, 
namely,  the  relation  of  mind  to  matter  in  man,  we 
have  awakened  another  in  resrard  to  the  relation 


94  MIND. 

of  mind  to  matter  in  the  universe  ;  there  is  other 
matter  than  that  concerned  in  man.  There  is 
another  world  than  the  one  within — an  external 
world,  full  of  organic  and  inorganic  being.  What 
now  is  mind's  relation  to  this  }  Is  mind  in  this 
outer,  as  we  have  found  it  to  be  in  the  inner, 
the  determining  factor .?  In  this  outer  world 
is  mind  also  first  t  If  we  were  allowed  to 
get  our  answer  from  that  great  transcendental 
thinker,  Immanuel  Kant,  it  would  be  this  :  ''With- 
out mind,  nature  cannot  be."  ''  It  is  mind  that 
makes  nature  ;  mind  is  in  the  universe  as  its  cause 
and  condition."  If  knowledge  of  the  external 
world  can  be,  it  can  be  alone  as  mind  in  man 
stands  face  to  face  with  mind  in  nature,  alone  as 
a  rational  being  stands  face  to  face  with  a  rational 
world.  Thus  would  Kant  have  answered  our  ques- 
tion. Looking,  therefore,  fairly  at  the  problem,  we 
shall,  I  think,  come  to  the  conclusion,  that  in  the 
external  world  as  in  the  internal,  mind  must  be 
the  determining  factor.  That  as  human  products 
in  art  and  literature,  in  invention  and  the  like,  are 
to  be  accounted  for  alone  as  mind  is  presupposed, 
so,  in  the  external  world,  phenomena  are  to  be 
explained  alone  on  the  admission  that  mind  has 
been  pre-existcnt. 


MIND.  95 

''  Show  us  a  God  in  nature  ;  prove  that  nature  is 
his  work,"  says  the  materiaUst,  ''and  we  will  be- 
lieve." Now  there  is  a  contradiction  of  terms  in 
that  demand.  The  materialist  has  no  right  to 
speak  of  nature.  What  is  nature }  It  is  the  cos- 
mos ;  the  orderly,  harmonious  system  that  lies 
without  us.  Nature  is  the  living  impersonal, 
which  is  the  opposite  of  mind  and  idea,  but  is 
exclusively  appointed  to  be  the  means,  organ, 
instrument  for  mind  and  idea,  and  in  its  normal 
condition  is  exclusively  determined  by  these. 

But  let  us  take  the  materialist  at  what  he  means, 
and  let  us  see  in  how  far  his  demand  may  be  met 
and  a  God  in  nature  be  pointed  out.  We  have 
space  but  for  two  propositions. 

First  :  It  is  alone  as  mind  is  postulated  that  the 
manifest  uniformity  of  construction  in  nature  in 
the  organic  world  can  be  explained.  Stoutly  have 
men  like  Herschel,  Clerk  Maxwell  and  others, 
maintained  that  this  uniformity  of  construction  in 
the  so-called  products  of  nature,  infallibly  stamps 
them  as  manufactured  articles,  not  as  the  products 
of  irrational  agencies,  but  of  an  intelligent  agent, 
designing  uniformity  of  product.  Now  notice 
what    led    them    to    this    conclusion.       They    ob- 


96  MIND. 

served  that  material  agencies  produced  effects 
when  left  free  to  operate.  That  water  rounded 
pebbles,  that  it  produced  soil,  and  that  in  one  way 
and  another  the  irrational  agencies  of  the  material 
world  produced  their  products.  But  it  was  also 
observed  that  these  products  were  characteristic. 
They  were  characteristic  in  that  they  lacked  uni- 
formity ;  the  pebbles  were  rounded,  but  they  were 
rounded  irregularly.  The  soil  was  irregular  in  the 
size  of  its  grains,  and  variable  in  its  constitution. 
It  was  also  noticed  that  wherever  the  mere  blind 
forces  of  matter  were  left  to  themselves,  that  this 
lack  of  uniformity  was  always  the  result.  But  it 
was  likewise  observed  that  this  was  not  the  case 
in  the  products  of  the  organic  world.  That,  on 
the  contrary,  they  always  appeared  as  though 
fashioned  after  a  pattern.  Two  ants  were  more 
alike  than  two  pebbles.  Two  leaves  of  the  same 
family,  while  vastly  more  complicated  in  structure, 
were  more  alike  than  two  particles  of  soil.  And 
so  on  all  through  the  organic  world.  Uniformity 
of  product  was  always  found  to  be  characteristic 
of  all  nature  products. 

Then  they  asked.   Mow  came  this  uniformity  } 
They    remembered    that    between    two    pieces    of 


MIND.  97 

metal  cast  in  the  same  mold,  tbere  was  the  closest 
resemblance.  Between  two  pieces  of  machinery 
made  after  the  same  pattern,  there  was  likewise 
an  intimate  resemblance.  But  in  the  cases  of  the 
piece  of  metal  and  the  piece  of  machinery,  the  like- 
ness was  to  be  accounted  for  in  the  fact  that  they 
had  been  made  after  a  pattern.  And  so  uniformity 
of  product  in  the  cases  cited,  pointed  back  to  an  in- 
telligent agent  in  whose  mind  the  pattern  existed 
before  it  took  shape  in  the  metal  piece  or  in  the 
finished  machine. 

And  thus  with  these  data  they  came  to  the  only 
conclusion  to  which  a  fair  process  of  reasoning 
could  bring  them,  and  said,  that  if  uniformity  of 
product  in  the  one  case  proved  the  priority  of 
mind  in  which  the  pattern  was  wrought  out,  so 
did  it  likewise  in  the  other.  They  reasoned  that 
uniformity  in  nature  proved  a  pattern,  and  that  a 
pattern  proved  an  intelligence  pre-existing  and 
conditioning  matter. 

Now  let  it  not  be  overlooked,  that  to  no  other 
conclusion,  reasoning  from  the  facts,  could  Her- 
schel  or  Clerk  Maxwell  have  come.  In  the  study 
of  species  there  was  found  to  have  existed  a  pat- 
tern.    And   it  was    equally   certain    that   without 


98  MIND. 

this  pattern  to  which  each  individual  might  be 
referred,  species  could  not  be  differentiated  or  a 
science  of  the  organic  world  made  out.  The  pat- 
tern accounted  for  the  uniformity,  the  uniformity 
proved  the  pattern. 

But  if  there  was  a  pattern,  then  mind  alone  could 
have  conceived  it.  And  hence  back  of  nature,  pre- 
existing and  conditioning  it,  mind  must  have  been. 
But  come  now  to  the  second  proposition  : 

Without  mind  pre-existent  and  determining  mat- 
ter, nature  could  not  be  interpreted,  or  a  science 
of  nature  formulated. 

Let  it  be  understood  that  there  is  no  argument 
formulated  by  skepticism  for  the  overthrow  of 
theism,  that  does  not  operate  with  equal  force 
against  itself.  Every  attempt  to  demonstrate  the 
impossibility  of  a  knowledge  of  God,  tells  with 
equal  force  against  the  possibility  of  all  knowl- 
edge. The  validity  of  the  principle  that  makes 
science  possible,  makes  theology  also  possible. 
If  nature  can  be  known,  God  also  can  be  known. 
See  how  this  is.  Ask  the  question,  How  comes  it 
that  nature  can  be  interpreted,  and  in  virtue  of 
what  is  such  interpretation  possible }  Do  not 
overlook  the  fact  that   when  the  scientist    comes 


MIND.  99 

to  nature  he  comes  to  it  with  the  conviction  that 
it  is  an  harmonious  whole.  That  it  stands  together 
as  the  parts  of  a  system,  part  rehited  to  part,  and 
each  interpreting  the  whole.  But  suppose  that 
nature  lacked  this  unity,  suppose  that  one  part 
sustained  no  relation  to  another,  and  had  no  pur- 
pose in  itself.  Suppose  that  one  phenomenon 
stood  to  another  as  the  pebbles  on  the  seashore 
stand  to  each  other,  unconnected,  unrelated,  and 
whence  then  could  Science  come  or  what  would  be 
its  foundation  }  You  cannot  interpret  a  confused 
mass  of  pebbles  or  from  such  a  mass  deduce  a 
science.  But  you  can  understand  the  plant,  and 
out  of  a  study  of  it  you  can  deduce  a  science. 

You  cannot  interpret  a  mass  of  soil,  but  you 
can  interpret  the  insect,  and  when  you  have  studied 
it,  and  observed  the  relation  of  one  of  its  parts  to 
another,  you  have  what  we  call  science.  But  how 
comes  this  t  There  is  and  can  be  but  one  answer  ; 
there  is  thought  in  the  one,  there  is  no  thought 
in  the  other.  Matter  in  itself  cannot  be  inter- 
preted ;  cannot  be  known.  The  more  it  has  been 
studied  the  more  positive  has  become  the  convic- 
tion that  we  must  remain  ignorant  of  it.  But  let 
matter  be  lifted  out  of  its  normal  condition  ;  let  it 


147766 


I  oo  MIND. 

be  transfigured  and  inwrought  by  mind  ;  let  parts 
be  brought  into  relation,  then  do  we  know  not, 
indeed,  the  matter,  but  the  relation,  the  schema, 
and  this  it  is  that  makes  knowledge.  Let  the 
base  matter  of  gases  and  minerals  in  the  labora- 
tory of  the  plant,  take  form  and  relation  in 
root,  and  branch,  and  leaf,  fiber,  and  flower  ;  let 
the  unrelated  matter  once  come  into  relation  as 
it  does  in  the  anatomy  of  the  insect  ;  let  base  mat- 
ter come  into  relation  in  molecules  or  in  worlds, 
and  then  does  knowledge  become  possible,  and 
sciences  are  built  up.  But,  observe  in  what  this 
knowledge  really  consists.  It  is  not  the  mat- 
ter, though  now  in  its  organized  forms,  that  you 
know  ;  it  is  the  schema,  the  relations,  the  mind 
evidenced  in  these  relationships  that  becomes  an 
object  of  knowledge.  This  it  is  that  makes  science, 
and  this  alone.  It  is  thought  in  nature  that  makes 
nature  knowable.  Except  as  nature  has  been  in- 
formed by  mind,  it  cannot  be  known.  To  be  ration- 
ally apprehended,  nature  must  first  be  rational.  To 
be  known  by  mind,  it  must  first  embody  mind  and 
envisage  that  by  virtue  of  which  it  alone  can  be 
known. 

Enter  the  workshop   of    the   mechanic.      Me  is 


MTND.  lOI 

shaping  the  various  parts  of  a  machine,  the  plan 
of  which  he  has  worked  out  in  his  mind.  Around 
you  are  curiously  wrought  pieces  of  wopd,  and  iron, 
and  steel ;  but  they  are  as  yet  disconnected,  un- 
related ;  but  a  mass  of  material.  Can  yet  get  even 
from  these  already  fashioned  pieces,  anything  that 
you  would  call  knowledge  1  Can  you  interpret 
them  }  The  mechanic  may,  for  he  knows  the 
relation  of  part  to  part.  But  this  relation  does 
not  appear  to  you,  and  hence  you  cannot  interpret 
them.  But  let  the  parts  be  put  together  so  that 
you  may  begin  to  see  the  relation  of  part  to  part, 
and  of  each  part  to  the  whole.  Let  the  process  go 
on  until  the  machine  stands  before  you,  the  living 
embodiment  of  the  designer's  idea  ;  then  what  was 
before  an  incoherent  mass,  becomes  that  which 
can  be  understood  by  the  intellect,  and  you  have 
added  to  your  knowledge.  But  what  made  the 
interpretation  possible  1  Fix  your  attention  on 
that.  How  came  it  that  you  could  interpret  the 
mechanism  in  the  one  case,  and  not  in  the  other  } 
When  you  understood  it,  it  was  because  you  read 
the  thought  that  was  embodied  in  it  ;  because  you 
saw  in  the  completed  work  an  idea  ;  because  reason 
in  the  machine  spoke  to  reason  in  you  ;  because 


I02  MIND. 

mind  spoke  to  mind  ;  because  the  mechanism 
sprang  from  mind  and  embodied  mind  :  in  virtue 
of  this  were  you  able  to  know  it  ;  without  this 
it  could  not  have  become  knowledge,  for  it  was 
mind  that  gave  it  meaning. 

To  make  the  matter,  if  possible,  still  clearer, 
take  Berkeley's  illustration.  On  the  ruins  of  Assy- 
rian temples,  on  the  walls  of  the  tombs  of  Karnak, 
amid  the  crumbling  ruins  of  Mexico,  are  to  be 
found  wonderful  signs  and  inscriptions  written 
there  by  the  ancient  races.  To  scholars,  these  in- 
scriptions are  full  of  meaning.  By  patient  study, 
by  a  careful  comparison  of  alphabet  with  alpha- 
bet, the  known  with  the  unknown,  scholars  have 
solved  the  meaning  of  these  inscriptions,  and  read 
the  history  of  nations  long  since  passed  away. 
But  the  thing  that  makes  the  interpretation  of 
these  inscriptions  possible  is  that  they  contain 
thought.  Unless  they  had  contained  thought, 
"  The  wild  raven,  or  the  lion  with  his  claws,  might 
have  scratched  figures  on  the  rocks,  but  then,  no 
man  could  have  read  them."  They  would  then 
have  expressed  no  thought,  therefore  could  not 
have  been  interpreted.  It  is  thought  embodied 
in  these  inscriptions  that  makes  them  possible  of 


MIND.  103 

interpretation.  Well,  now,  go  out  into  nature. 
You  say  you  can  understand  it.  To  you  it  is  a 
grand,  beautiful,  harmonious  system.  You  see  in 
it  relations  so  invariable  that  you  can  get  out  of 
them  the  various  sciences.  Now  what  follows  ? 
This  :  you  could  not  understand  nature,  if  nature 
were  not  rational,  or  if  it  embodied  not  thought. 
It  is  mind  in  nature  that  makes  nature  knowable ; 
rid  it  of  mind,  and  no  man  could  know  it,  for  it  is 
mind  in  nature,  manifested  in  relationships,  that 
makes  it  knowable.  Alone  as  mind  in  man  stands 
face  to  face  with  mind  in  nature,  can  knowledge 
or  science  be.  And  so,  out  of  a  true  analysis  of 
man,  as  well  as  out  of  a  true  analysis  of  nature, 
the  place  of  mind  in  the  universe  is  determined. 
In  man,  if  knowledge  can  be,  in  nature,  if  nature 
can  be  interpreted,  mind  must  be  first.  The  un- 
conditioned before  the  conditioned,  the  undeter- 
mined before  the  determined.  Mind  in  man  is 
the  condition  of  knowledge.  Mind  in  nature,  its 
archetype  and  interpretation. 

It  was  the  vision  of  this,  the  perception  of  mind 
in  nature,  speaking  to  mind  in  man,  that  led 
Tennyson  to  ask  of  his  soul  the  question  :  — 


I04  MIND. 

"  The  sun,  the  moon,  the  stars,  the  seas, 

The  hills,  and  the  plains. 
Are  not  these,  O,  soul,  the  vision  of 

Him  who  reigns  ? 

"  Is  not  the  vision  He  ?     Though  He  be  not 

That  which  He  seems  ? 
Dreams  are  true  while  they  last,  and 

Do  not  we  live  in  dreams  ? 

"  Dark  is  the  world  to  thee,  thyself  art 

The  reason  why. 
For  is  He  not  all  but  thou,  that  hast 

Power  to  feel,  '  I  am  I  '  ? 

"  Speak  to  Him,  thou,  for  He  hears,  and 

Spirit  with  spirit  can  meet. 
Closer  is  He  than  breathing  and  nearer 

Than  hands  and  feet. 

"  And  the  ear  of  man  cannot  hear,  and 

The  eye  of  man  cannot  see  ; 
But  if  we  could  hear  and  see  this 

Vision  —  were  it  not  He  ?  " 


LIFE. 

"  I  affirm  that  no  shred  of  trustworthy  experimental  testimony 
exists  to  prove  that  life  in  our  day  has  ever  appeared  indepen- 
dently of  antecedent  life."  —  Tyndall. 

"  That  dead  matter  cannot  produce  a  living  organism,  is  the 
universal  experience  of  the  most  eminent  physiologists.  Life  can 
be  produced  from  life  only. "  —  "  The  Unseen  Universe. "  pp.  2  29 
230. 


LIFE. 

In  him  was  life.  —  Jxo.  i :  4. 

In  the  year  1809  there  was  born  in  Shrewsbury, 
England,  a  boy  whose  name,  in  after  years,  was  to 
be  inseparably  connected  with  a  theory  which, 
more  than  any  other,  was  to  disturb  the  current 
of  the  religious  and  scientific  thinking  of  his 
times.  His  name  was  Charles  Robert  Darwin. 
From  his  infancy  he  was  in  love  with  nature  ; 
roaming  the  hillsides,  or  wandering  alone  in  the 
sequestered  forest  that  stood  not  far  distant  from 
his  father's  dwelling,  young  Charles  in  his  leis- 
ure moments  might  have  been  seen  looking  with 
boyish  curiosity  at  every  thing  that  he  saw  ;  study- 
ing, in  his  boyish  way,  the  various  forms  of  ani- 
mate life  that  peopled  the  downs,  the  stream,  or 
the  pond.     This  was  his  favorite  pastime. 

Thus,  early  cultivating  the  acquaintance  of  na- 
ture, she  revealed  to  him  her  secrets,  and  when  he 
came  to  manhood  he  understood  her  as  did  few 
107 


io8  LIFE. 

Others  of  his  time.  In  1859  he  published  his  work 
entitled  *'The  Origin  of  the  Species  by  means  of 
Natural  Selection,"  which  at  once  attracted  the 
attention  of  the  thinking  world.  Not  that  the 
theory,  which  in  this  work  he  advocated,  was  new  ; 
it  had  been  the  favorite  theory  of  certain  thinkers 
centuries  before.  But  in  him  it  received  a  new 
impetus,  and  out  of  his  wealth  of  nature  knowledge, 
in  the  estimation  of  some,  it  also  received  new 
corroboration.  Though  as  much  may  not  be  said 
of  many  of  his  disciples,  it  is  due  Mr.  Darwin  to 
say  that  he  was  sincere.  He  firmly  believed  that 
the  system  of  evolution  was  the  system  according 
to  which  nature  could  best  be  explained  ;  and  so, 
in  the  interests  of  that  system,  he  spent  his  life. 
When  one  reflects  on  the  kind  of  a  man  that  Mr. 
Darwin  was  —  his  kindness  of  heart,  his  nobility  of 
nature,  his  honesty  of  investigation  —  a  feeling  of 
regret  can  hardly  be  repressed  on  account  of  the 
fact  that  his  name  has  come  to  be  inseparably 
associated  with  a  theory  so  soon  to  be  discarded  ; 
for  already  the  verdict  of  Science  is  against  evolu- 
tion. Here  and  there  on  the  list  of  investigators 
may  still  be  found,  associated  with  this  system, 
the  name  of  an   investigator  of  some  prominence. 


LIFE.  109 

Spencer,  Haeckcl,  Bastian,  and  a  few  others,  are 
still  on  the  side  of  evolution.  But,  as  a  system  of 
nature,  evolution  has  lived  its  day.  Faulty  as  a 
theory,  and  unsubstantiated  by  fact,  by  the  fore- 
most of  modern  scientists  it  is  at  present  rejected. 
Tyndall,  Mivart,  Dawson,  Dana,  and  a  host  of 
others  who  are  unquestionably  leading  the  van  of 
modern  scientific  thought,  as  well  as  shaping  the 
thought  of  the  future,  are  against  it. 

But  whatever  may  be  our  judgment  of  the  theory 
that  Mr.  Darwin  advocated  so  earnestly,  it  cannot 
be  denied  that  the  discussion  which  sprang  up 
around  it  has  been  of  immense  profit.  For,  by 
that  discussion,  the  attention  of  men  has  again 
been  turned  back  to  an  old  problem,  and  new 
attempts  made  to  solve  it.  I  speak  of  the  problem 
of  life.  Stimulated  by  what  Mr.  Darwin  said,  new 
attempts  have  of  late  been  made  at  its  solution, 
and  the  question  has  again  been  asked,  How  is  the 
presence  of  life  in  the  world  to  be  accounted  for  1 
In  his  work  on  "The  Origin  of  the  Species,"  Mr. 
Darwin  plainly  affirmed  it  as  his  conviction  that 
the  development  of  the  species  was  a  natural  pro- 
cess. He  affirmed,  that,  starting  with  life,  varia- 
tion, heredity,  and  natural  selection,  are  sufficient 


no  LIFE. 

to  account  for  the  varied  forms  of  organic  life. 
But  to  his  credit  let  it  be  remembered  that  the 
theory  of  evolution,  as  held  by  him,  was  never 
meant  to  explain  facts  which  others  of  his  school 
have  vainly  attempted  to  make  it  cover.  He  never 
meant  that  the  theory  of  evolution  should  be  made 
to  account  for  life  as  to  its  origin.  And  it  has 
been  the  unwarranted  assumptions  of  many,  whose 
names  have  been  mentioned  in  the  same  cate- 
gory, that  has  brought  the  system  of  Mr.  Darwin 
into  disrepute.  Herbert  Spencer,  Ernst  Haeckel, 
and  others,  while  usually  classed  along  with  Mr. 
Darwin  as  evolutionists,  are  not  evolutionists,  in 
the  sense  in  which  Mr.  Darwin  was  an  evolutionist. 
With  them,  development  is  made  to  account  for 
all  ;  not  only  for  new  species  and  forms,  but 
for  life  itself.  They  affirm  that  matter  holds 
withm  itself  "the  promise  and  potency  of  all 
life,"  and  that  when  matter  is  brought  into  certain 
relations,  life  may  be  evolved  out  of  it.  And  thus 
with  them  evolution  is  a  causal  theory  . 
given  but  matter  and  force,  and  out  of  these  may 
be  evolved  all  that  is,  or  that  can  be.  Matter 
and  force  are  the  creators  of  life. 

Not  so  did    Mr.    Darwin   regard    the   theory  of 


LIFE.  1 1 1 

evolution.  With  him  it  was  never  intended  to  be 
anything  other  than  a  modal  theory.  He  meant 
it  simply  to  describe  the  process  according  to 
which  nature  worked.  He  started  with  life,  and 
held  that  back  of  it  in  our  search  for  its  origin, 
experimental  science  could  not  go.  He  believed 
that  if  the  origin  of  life  was  to  be  found,  it  could 
be  found  alone  by  transcending  the  limits  of  the 
experimental  ;  in  short,  life  in  his  judgment  was  to 
be  referred  to  the  miraculous  interference  of  an 
intelligent  Creator  at  least  to  initiate  the  process. 
But  once  having  life  in  the  world,  then  he  held 
that  the  system  of  evolution  could  be  made  to 
account  for  the  almost  infinite  variety  of  its 
manifestations.  And  thus  you  see,  that  between 
these  views  of  evolution,  especially  in  their  re- 
lation to  the  great  problem  as  to  the  origin  of  life, 
there  is  not  only  a  wide,  but  also  a  most  essential 
difference.  As  held  by  Mr.  Darwin,  evolution  not 
only  left  room  for,  but  it  indeed  demanded  the 
interference  of  an  intelligent  Creator  at  least  to 
initiate  the  process.  But  as  held  by  the  opposite 
wing  of  the  evolutionist  school,  evolution  denies 
the  interference  of  a  Creator  and  is  little  else  but  a 
synonym  for  atheism.  It  deifies  matter  and  force, 
and  makes  out  of  them  its  God. 


112  LIFE. 

Now,  with  this  system  as  held  by  Mr.  Darwin, 
we  have  nothing  to  do  in  the  present  discussion. 
Whether  it  has  proved  itself  adequate  to  the  test 
even  as  a  modal  theory  we  shall  let  others  more 
competent  than  ourselves  decide.  It  is  only  in  so 
far  as  the  theory  of  evolution  bears  on  the  ques- 
tion as  to  the  origin  of  life,  only  so  far  as  it  is 
made  a  causal  theory,  does  it  concern  us  now. 
What  has  been  the  origin  of  life  }  Has  life  been 
evolved  out  of  matter  according  to  certain  fixed 
laws  .-^  Or  is  its  presence  in  the  world  to  be  attrib- 
uted as  Mr.  Darwin  attributed  it,  to  something 
higher  than  matter  ;  in  short,  to  a  personal  Creator, 
who  possessing  life  in  himself,  at  some  time  com- 
municated that  life  to  the  non-living  matter  of  the 
present  world  }  To  make  ourselves  acquainted 
with  the  more  recent  investigation  as  bearing  on 
these  great  questions,  is  at  present  the  task 
before  us. 

To  begin,  therefore  :  our  first  aim  must  be  to  get 
a  clear  conception  of  what  is,  in  strictness,  living- 
matter.  For  I  need  hardly  tell  you  that  apart  from 
matter  we  cannot  study  life  at  least  by  the  experi- 
mental method.  Even  if  we  could  form  some 
mental  conception  of  what  life  in  itself  may  be,  we 


LIFE.  113 

could  never  be  certain  as  to  the  correctness  of  our 
ideas.  Their  correctness  could  never  be  scien- 
tifically established,  for  life  can  be  studied  alone 
as  it  exists  in  living  matter.  But  now  as  to 
what  is  in  reality  living  matter,  there  is  among 
many  a  very  erroneous  notion  ;  and  few  terms  in 
our  common  conversation  are  more  loosely  used 
than  this  term  ''living."  In  our  study  of  the 
plant  here,  one  of  the  first  things  that  attracts 
our  attention  is  a  steady  process  of  expansion,  in 
the  on-going  of  which  nutrient  matter  is  assimi- 
lated and  changed  into  the  material  of  root  and 
stem  and  leaf  and  flower.  This  process  we  call 
growth.  And  when  we  wish  to  distinguish  be- 
tween the  plant  and  some  inanimate  object,  we 
speak  of  it  as  living.  In  the  brute  and  in  man  we 
observe  a  like  process  of  consumption  and  regener- 
ation ;  and  when  speaking  of  either,  we  again  make 
use  of  this  term  and  speak  of  the  *'  living  "  brute  or 
the  "  living  "  man,  as  the  case  may  be.  And  thus  we 
have  come  to  regard  the  entire  structure  of  the 
plant,  of  the  brute,  and  of  man,  as  living.  But 
such  is  not  in  reality  the  case.  By  far  the  greater 
part  of  every  so-called  living  structure  is  not  living 
at  all,  but  is  dead  or  formed  material.     Not  more 


TI4  LIFE. 

than  one  fifth  of  the  material  in  the  human  body, 
or  in  the  framework  of  the  plant  yonder,  is  really 
alive,  or  can  properly  be  called  living  matter.  The 
only  part  in  any  structure  that  is  really  alive,  is 
those  little  masses  of  semi-fluid  matter  to  which 
the  older  biologists  gave  the  name  cells.  If  there- 
fore our  aim  is  to  make  ourselves  acquainted  with 
living  matter,  we  fnust  not  only  begin,  but  we  must 
also  end  with  the  cell,  for,  apart  from  it,  we  shall 
nowhere  in  the  present  world  find  life  to  be  in 
association. 

And  now  that  we  may  get  a  proper  conception 
of  what  a  cell  is,  and  hence  some  idea  of  what 
the  nature  of  living  matter  is,  let  us  suppose  an 
experiment. 

We  have  here,  let  us  say,  a  grain  of  wheat.  If, 
now,  we  drop  it  into  a  vessel  containing  water,  it 
will  soon  send  out  its  tiny  roots  downward,  and  a 
little  shoot,  destined  to  become  the  stem,  upward. 
If,  after  a  reasonable  time  has  elapsed,  we  were 
to  take  one  of  these  little  shoots,  and  by  a 
delicate  movement  of  the  section  knife  were  to 
cut  a  very  thin  section  from  it,  and  then  examine 
the  section  thus  obtained  with  a  microscope,  we 
would  find  it  to  be  composed   largely  of  exceed- 


LIFE.  115 

ingly  small  round  or  oval  globules  closely  packed 
together.  These  are  the  cells  ;  but  as  you  look 
at  them  now,  they  present  very  much  the  same 
appearance  that  a  mass  of  frozen  drops  of  water 
would  present  ;  for  as  they  lie  thus  together  in  a 
compact  mass  you  see  nothing  but  their  outlines, 
and  would  hardly  suspect  their  being  made  up  of 
parts.  But  if  instead  of  the  pure  water  in  which 
the  little  root  grew,  you  had  used  water  with 
which  an  ammoniacal  solution  of  carmine  had  been 
united,  the  section  would  on  examination  present 
quite  a  different  appearance  from  the  one  it  pre- 
sented before.  For  as  the  process  of  growth  would 
now  go  on,  the  carmine  fluid,  taken  up  by  the  pores 
of  the  root,  would  stain  the  cells,  so  that,  instead 
of  appearing  as  before,  perfectly  transparent  and 
homogeneous,  they  would  now  be  found  to  be 
made  up  of  parts.  Inside  the  fluid  mass  of  the  cell 
would  be  found  one  or  more  bodies  called  nucleus 
or  nuclei,  according  to  the  number,  and  in  addition 
to  these,  outside  the  fluid  mass  would  be  observed 
a  membrane  or  wall.  In  short,  we  would  find  that 
each  cell  instead  of  being  constituted  of  a  simple 
mass  of  homogeneous  protoplasm,  is  in  reality 
made  up  of  three  parts  :  the  wall ;  the  fluid  mass 


ii6  LIFE. 

within  the  wall  ;  and  the  little  body  called  the 
nucleus.  Essentially  the  same  appearance  would 
be  presented,  if  instead  of  a  thin  section  of  a 
plant  we  were  to  substitute  a  small  piece  of 
animal  tissue.  For  when  stained  with  the  car- 
mine fluid  the  cells  contained  within  it  will  like- 
wise be  found  to  be  made  up  of  the  three  parts 
already  named  ;  the  cell  wall,  its  fluid  contents  or 
bioplasm,  and  the  nucleus. 

Now,  until  recently,  most  biologists  regarded 
the  cell,  made  up  as  we  have  learned  of  its  three 
parts,  as  the  only  material  form  with  which  life 
could  be  associated.  They  insisted  that  wherever 
life  was,  there  also  was  the  cell  with  its  three 
parts ;  they  called  the  cell  *'  the  ultimate  mor- 
phological unit;"  and  by  that  they  meant  that 
these  little  bodies  alone  were  concerned  in  vital 
action,  and  that  by  them  every  tissue  whether  of 
bone,  or  muscle,  or  nerve,  or  bloodvessel  was  built 
up.  It  was  held  that  these  were  the  machines  by 
whose  agency  every  organism  in  the  category  of 
organic  being  has  been  wrought  and  fashioned  ; 
here  they  have  busied  themselves  in  the  building 
of  the  flower  with  its  stamens,  its  petals,  its  pistil 
and    seed    lobes  ;    there    l)ui]din<'-    the    bones,    the 


LIFE.  1 1 7 

framework  of  the  human  body;  here  fashioning 
the  membrane  of  the  ear,  there  the  delicate  and 
wondrous  senses  of  the  eye  :  everywhere  taking 
of  the  unformed  material  and  working  out  of  it 
the  various  parts  of  the  limitless  forms  of  organic 
life. 

Now  the  work  that  is  done  by  these  little  artisans, 
the  cells,  was  held  to  be  this  :  to  transform  dead 
material  into  living  material,  and  then  this  again 
into  the  formed  material  of  the  tissues.  For  every 
part  of  an  organism  when  once  built  up  has  been 
fashioned  out  of  dead  material  in  the  workshop  of 
life.  Every  formed  part  was  once  dead  material, 
then  transformed  into  living  material,  then  de- 
posited as  formed  material  ;  and  so  while  it  is  true 
that  the  greater  part  of  every  organism  is  dead, 
yet  every  particle  of  it  was  once  alive  ;  for  it  is  by 
being  made  living,  that  former  material  is  wrought 
out  of  dead  matter. 

But  see  how  these  cells  accomplish  their  work. 
Here,  let  us  say,  is  one  of  these  living  units,  a  cell, 
possessing  as  it  does  the  power  of  changing  non- 
living matter  into  living,  and  then  again  in  its 
tiny  workshop,  working  this  living  matter  into 
formed  material  ;  the  dead  matter  out  of  which  it 


Il8  LIFE. 

is  to  build  is  called  pabulum.  Well,  here  is  our 
cell  surrounded  by  this  nutrient  matter,  or,  as  it 
is  called,  pabulum.  Now  watch  the  progress  as  it 
goes  on.  The  first  thing  observed,  is  the  minute 
particles  of  pabulum  passing  through  the  cell  wall 
into  the  interior  of  the  cell.  Here  it  comes  in 
contact  with  the  bioplasm  or  living  matter  that  is 
inclosed  by  the  cell  wall.  When  the  pabulum 
once  comes  in  contact  with  the  bioplasm  of  the 
cell,  it  is  at  once  changed  into  living  matter  or 
bioplasm.  Then  losing  again  its  life,  that  which 
was  once  pabulum,  and  in  its  second  stage  bioplasm, 
is  now  deposited  inside  the  cell  wall  as  formed 
material.  At  first  we  would  observe  this  formed 
material  appearing  as  a  thin  film  on  the  inner 
surface  of  the  cell,  the  film  gradually  becoming 
thicker  and  thicker  by  the  gradual  deposition  of 
the  formed  material. 

Thus  we  should  see  our  little  artisans  building 
up  tissue  after  tissue,  and  effecting  that  wonder- 
ful phenomenon  called  growth.  Out  of  the  non- 
living pabulum,  the  bioplasm  of  the  cell  makes 
living  matter,  and  while  in  the  living  state  works 
it  into  the  formed  material,  of  which  every  organ- 
ism, whether  of  plant  or  animal,  is  in  the  main 
composed. 


LIFE.  1  1 9 

But  now  we  have  come  to  a  point  at  which  I 
must  ask  you  to  make  a  distinction.  If  we  are  to 
study  life  in  the  light  of  the  most  recent  investi- 
gation, we  must  distinguish  between  what  was 
formerly  and  what  is  now  regarded  as  living  mat- 
ter. The  necessity  of  this  distinction  arises  from 
the  fact  that  recent  investigation  has  shown  the 
former  biologists  to  have  been  in  error  in  regard 
to  the  answer  given  to  the  question  as  to  what  is 
distinctively  living  matter.  It  was  held  formerly 
as  I  have  already  indicated,  that  living  matter  is 
the  cell  as  such,  and  biologists  spoke  of  it  as  the 
"living  unit."  But  at  present,  with  a  better 
knowledge  than  was  then  had,  it  is  almost  univer- 
sally felt,  that  either  the  definition  then  given  of 
what  a  cell  is  must  be  discarded,  or  else  so  enlarged 
as  to  make  it  cover  any  simple  mass  of  bioplasm. 
As  a  consequence,  the  answer  that  is  now  given 
to  the  question.  What  is  a  cell }  is  quite  different 
from  the  answer  given  to  the  same  question  years 
ago.  Prior  to  the  year  1869,  a  cell  was  described 
as  we  have  described  it  :  as  a  living  unit  made 
up  of  three  parts  ;  cell-wall,  fluid  contents,  and 
nucleus.  It  was  then  held  that  life  belonged  alone 
to  the  cell  as  thus  constituted.     At  present,  how- 


I20  Life. 

ever,  it  is  clearly  established  that  two  of  these 
parts  are  not  essential  to  the  presence  of  life,  and 
do  not  necessarily  belong  to  living  matter.  But 
that  life  may  be  when  both  cell-wall  and  nucleus 
are  absent,  and  nothing  present  but  the  fluid  con- 
tents or  bioplasm.  In  other  words,  it  is  now  set- 
tled that  bioplasm  alone  is  living  matter. 

Well,  now,  I  have  called  your  attention  to  this 
because  of  this  fact,  that  you  will  often  hear  the 
statement  that  the  cell  theory  has  been  aban- 
doned ;  and  I  wanted  you  to  understand  the 
precise  feature  of  it  that  has  been  outlived.  Its 
defect  was,  that  it  defined  the  cell  as  a  living 
unit  made  up  of  the  three  parts  already  mentioned, 
and  narrowed  life  down  to  the  cell  as  thus  defined. 
And  when  it  was  afterward  found,  as  we  shall 
presently  learn,  that  life  was  not  confined  to  the 
cell  as  such,  but  existed  where  nothing  was  but 
simple  bioplasm  ;  that  the  wall  and  nucleus  were 
in  no  way  essential,  and  that  the  smallest  mass  of 
bioplasm  might  with  perfect  propriety  be  called  a 
cell,  in  that  it  did  all  that  the  former  biologists 
attributed  to  the  cell,  then  was  the  cell  theory, 
so  far  at  least  as  its  definition  is  concerned,  aban- 
doned and  the  fact  established  that  bioplasm  alone 


LIFE.  121 

is  living  matter.  To-day,  outside  of  Germany,  the 
cell  theory  with  its  defective  definition  has  but 
few  adv'Ocates.  Originating  as  it  did  with  the 
great  German  naturalist,  Schleiden,  it  may  per- 
haps be,  that  a  reverence  for  its  great  originator 
has  had  something  to  do  with  its  present  hold  in 
the  Fatherland.  But  however  that  may  be,  its 
essential  defects  have  long  since  been  demon- 
strated. Early  in  the  present  century  the  emi- 
nent physiologist  Fletcher  pointed  out  the  error 
in  the  cell  theory,  as  then  held,  and  showed  that 
its  definition  of  living  matter  was  too  narrow.  He 
proved  that  in  some  cases,  at  least,  living  matter 
was  structureless  and  that  life  was  not  contingent 
on  matter  arranged  as  it  was  in  the  cell.  But 
while  Fletcher  headed  the  movement  that  has 
since  culminated  in  what  is  now  called  the  Proto- 
plasmic Theory  of  Life,  it  remained  for  Lionel 
Beale  to  demonstrate  the  truthfulness  of  the  posi- 
tion that  Fletcher  took.  In  his  work  on  Bioplasm 
and  also  in  that  entitled  How  to  Work  With  the 
Microscope,  this  unsurpassed  investigator  conclu- 
sively shows  the  error  of  the  cell  theorists,  and 
establishes  on  the  one  hand,  that  life  is  not  con- 
tingent on  the    presence   of   either   cell    wall    or 


\ 


122  LIFE. 

nucleus,  and  on  the  other,  that  both  cell-wall  and 
nucleus  are  but  after  products,  the  results  of  bio- 
plasmic  action.  By  Beale,  living  matter  was  nar- 
rowed down  to  one  single  substance,  viz ;  the  fluid 
contents  of  the  cell ;  for  when  you  have  taken 
away  the  little  bodies  in  the  interior  and  also 
the  membrane  on  the  exterior,  you  still  have  left 
the  semi-fluid  mass.  Well,  now,  when  Beale  found 
that  both  the  cell  wall  and  the  nucleus  might  be 
absent  and  life  still  be  present,  he  came  to  the 
only  conclusion  at  which  it  was  possible  for  him 
to  arrive,  which  was,  that  life  had  alone  to  do  with 
the  fluid  contents  of  the  cell  ;  that  it  alone  was 
living  matter.  He  then  showed  that  wherever  it 
was  present  life  was  also  present ;  that  when  it 
was  absent  life  was  also  absent.  To  this  semi- 
fluid mass,  always  found  within  the  living  cell,  he 
gave  the  name  bioplasm. 

But  see  now  how  Beale  proved  that  bioplasm 
alone  is  living  matter.  His  proof  rests  on  a  prin- 
ciple well  known  to  every  one  at  all  acquainted 
with  microscopical  technology ;  the  principle  of 
selective  stains.  In  order  to  illustrate  the  method 
by  which  Beale  proved  his  position,  let  us  once 
more    suppose    an    experiment.     Let    us    suppose 


LIFE.  123 

that  we  have  here  a  thin  transparent  tissue  taken 
from  some  portion  of  the  animal  body.  If  it  has 
been  selected  with  a  view  to  our  experiment,  it 
will  contain  in  it,  muscular  fiber,  connective  tissue, 
blood  vessels,  nerve  threads  and  cells.  But  having 
placed  it  under  the  microscope,  you  will  find  it 
well-nigh  impossible  to  differentiate  the  various 
tissues  ;  the  structure  will  appear  nearly  homoge- 
neous. There  are  the  nerve  fibers,  but  you  cannot 
trace  them  on  account  of  the  fact  that  they  present 
the  same  appearance  as  the  surrounding  tissues. 
There  is  living  matter  and  formed  material,  but 
you  cannot  distinguish  the  one  from  the  other. 
Well,  now,  if  you  remember  that  the  chemical 
constitution  of  each  of  these  parts  differs  from  the 
chemical  constitution  of  the  others,  you  will  under- 
stand why  it  is  that  different  chemical  compounds 
will  act  on  these  various  parts  in  different  ways. 
One  compound  will  stain  one  particular  tissue, 
say  the  muscle,  while  it  will  have  no  effect  what- 
ever on  the  nerve  fiber.  Another  fluid  will  take 
hold  of  the  living  matter  and  give  to  it  a  certain 
color,  and  at  the  same  time  leave  the  formed  mate- 
rial unchanged. 

Take,  now,  the  tissue  which  a  moment  ago  we 


124  LIFE. 

put  under  the  microscope,  and  which  then  ap- 
peared to  be  perfectly  homogeneous  ;  put  it  here 
for  a  few  moments  in  a  watch-glass  containing  a 
solution  of  picro  carmine.  If  you  now  examine  it, 
you  will  find  that  you  have  stained  the  connective 
tissue  and  the  nuclei  a  bright  red,  while  the  muscle 
has  retained  its  normal  color.  Now  transfer  it  to 
a  vessel  containing  water  to  which  a  few  drops  of 
acetic  acid  have  been  added,  and  when  thoroughly 
saturated  transfer  it  to  a  solution  of  safranine,  and 
you  will  observe  that  you  have  now  succeeded  in 
staining  the  muscle  and  the  epithelium.  If  now 
you  put  the  tissue  again  under  the  microscope,  it 
will  present  quite  a  different  appearance  from  that 
which  it  presented  in  the  first  instance.  You  have 
now,  on  account  of  the  difference  in  color  of  the 
various  tissues,  no  difficulty  in  differentiating  each 
particular  one,  any  more  than  you  would  have  in 
selecting  the  white  threads  from  the  black  in  a 
cotton  fabric. 

Now  it  was  the  application  of  this  principle  of 
selective  stains  to  the  various  tissues  of  living 
organisms,  that  furnished  Beale  with  the  facts 
whereby  he  sustained  his  position  that  the  thin, 
viscid  material   found  in  the  cell,  alone  was  alive. 


LIFE.  125 

He  found  that  when  a  portion  of  animal  or  vege- 
table tissue  was  immersed  in  a  solution  of  carmine, 
the  living  matter  was  always  stained  by  the  fluid. 
By  repeated  experiments  he  proved  that  wherever 
there  was  living  matter,  the  carmine  was  sure  to 
find  it,  select  it  out,  communicate  to  it  its  color,  so 
that  when  examined  under  the  microscope  it  be- 
came an  easy  thing  to  distinguish  the  living  matter 
from  the  dead  or  formed  material.  What  now 
became  of  the  cell  theory  when  this  selective 
power  of  carmine  was  discovered  and  its  affinity 
for  living  matter  established,  I  have  already  indi- 
cated. By  the  carmine  process  it  was  shown  that 
the  cell-wall  was  simply  formed  material ;  that  it 
did  not  live.  Through  it  to  the  interior  of  the  cell 
the  carmine  fluid  passed  and  repassed,  and  while  it 
never  failed  to  stain  the  bioplasm  within,  it  had 
no  effect  on  the  cell-wall  itself.  Thus  it  was 
shown  that  not  the  membrane,  but  that  which 
was  contained  within  the  membrane  was  the  essen- 
tial thing.  That  the  cell-wall  had  no  more  to  do 
with  life  than  the  shell  which  the  snail  secretes 
has  to  do  with  the  life  of  the  snail  itself  ;  and  that 
as  the  shell  of  the  snail  is  but  the  secretion  and 
after  product  of  the  living  animal,  so  is  the  cell- 


126  LIFE. 

wall  but  the  product  of  the  living  bioplasm  within. 
But  as  the  cell-wall  was  thus  proven  to  be  not  an 
essential  element,  so  also  with  the  nucleus  and 
nuclei ;  for  it  was  found  that  bioplasm  in  a  com- 
paratively quiescent  state  is  not  unfrequently 
entirely  destitute  of  either.  In  many  of  the  fungi 
and  lichens  the  nucleus  was  found  to  be  wanting:, 
and  the  same  was  found  true  even  in  many  forms 
of  the  amoebae.  It  is  the  oft-expressed  opinion 
of  Beale  that  the  nucleus  and  nuclei,  like  the  cell- 
wall,  are  after  products,  and  that  the  bioplasm 
having  been  first  formed,  these  appear  in  it  after- 
ward as  new  centers  of  growth  or  of  more  intense 
vital  activity.  He  believed  that  while  they  possess 
the  same  composition  as  the  material  of  bioplasm, 
they  by  no  means  constitute  an  essential  factor, 
from  the  fact  that  life  may  exist  whether  they  be 
present  or  absent. 

Well,  now  you  see  what,  as  the  result  of  recent 
investigation,  has  become  of  the  cell  theory  as 
such.  It  held  that  the  cell,  made  up  of  the 
nucleus,  cell-wall  and  fluid  contents,  was  a  living 
unit ;  that  the  phenomenon  of  life  could  be  mani- 
fested alone  when  each  and  all  of  these  were  ])res- 
cnt  and  existed  toirethcr  as  a  unit,      l^ut  when  it 


LIFE.  127 

was  found  that  the  cell-wall  was  often  wanting, 
and  that  the  nucleus  was  by  no  means  invariably 
present  —  in  short,  when  it  was  found  that  bio- 
plasm was  the  only  element  that  could  not  be 
dispensed  with  and  life  yet  be  present  — then  was 
not  only  the  cell  theory  abandoned,  but  the  fact 
also  established  that  bioplasm  alone  lives  ;  it  alone 
is  living  matter.  Now  that  was  a  great  step. 
You  can  see  at  a  glance  that  it  wonderfully  sim- 
plified the  problem  of  life,  in  that  it  narrowed 
living  matter  down  to  one  simple  homogeneous 
substance,  the  transparent  and  colorless,  and,  so 
far  as  can  be  ascertained  by  examination  with  the 
highest  powers,  perfectly  structureless,  bioplasm. 
But  having  made  this  advanced  step  towards  the 
solution  of  the  great  question,  another  was  imme- 
diately attempted.  When  it  was  settled  that  pro- 
toplasm, or  to  use  Beale's  term,  bioplasm,  was  the 
only  living  substance,  then  the  nature  of  bioplasm 
itself  became  the  subject  of  investigation.  It  was 
asked,  May  not  this  living  substance  be  produced  1 
May  not  its  chemical  formula  be  determined,  so 
that  by  a  proper  combination  of  the  elements 
entering  into  its  composition,  living  matter  may 
be  evolved }     For  is    not    life,  after   all,  but    the 


128  LIFE. 

result  of  the  union  of  chemical  elements  united 
in  a  certain  way  and  in  certain  proportions  ? 
Well,  these  are  the  questions  at  which  scientific 
men  have  assiduously  been  working  for  more  than 
a  quarter  of  a  century,  and  with  what  results  we 
shall  presently  see.  Clearly  the  first  thing  to 
be  determined  was,  whether  this  living  matter  is 
identical  in  all  living  structures.  If  bioplasm  is 
not  identical,  if  the  bioplasm  of  the  oak,  or  the 
flower,  differs  from  the  bioplasm  of  the  amoeba 
or  man,  if  that  of  the  most  simple  living  structure 
is  not  the  same  as  that  of  the  most  complex,  then 
the  question  would  have  been  indeed  a  most  intri- 
cate one.  But  that  difficulty  did  not  stand  in  the 
way.  By  the  aid  of  the  microscope  and  the  vari- 
ous tests  known  to  the  chemist,  bioplasm  was 
found  to  be  identical,  and  the  fact  established 
that  wherever  found  it  has  always  the  same  com- 
position. It  has  been  proven  that  the  bioplasm 
of  the  embryo  is  the  same  as  that  of  the  adult  ; 
that  that  of  the  most  inveterate  morbid  growth 
could  not  be  distinguished  from  that  of  the  healthy 
tissue,  and  that  even  the  bioplasm  of  the  lowest 
fungus  is  the  same  as  that  of  tlie  brain  of  man. 
And  thus  you  see  what  have  been  some  of  the 


LIFE.  129 

results  of  these  recent  years  of  biological  investi- 
gation. To  a  certain  extent  those  results  have 
been  most  satisfactory.  On  the  one  hand,  living 
matter  has  been  clearly  defined  ;  the  fact  has 
been  established  that  the  only  matter  that  lives 
is  the  thin  viscid  and  transparent  fluid  of  the  cells, 
and  on  the  other  hand  it  has  also  been  settled 
that  between  the  bioplasm  of  the  lowest  and  that 
of  the  highest  organism  no  difference  exists,  and 
that  bioplasm  everywhere  and  under  all  circum- 
stances is  identical.  And  thus  you  see  what 
progress  has  of  late  been  made  toward  the  solu- 
tion of  the  problem  of  life. 

It  is  clear  that  now  but  one  step  remains,  and 
that  is  the  production  of  living  matter.  For  you 
see  that  before  the  question  as  to  the  origin  of 
life  can  be  said  to  be  answered  by  experimental 
science,  it  must  not  only  tell  us  what  living  matter 
is  and  what  it  is  not,  but  the  process  whereby 
living  matter  has  been  evolved  must  be  demon- 
strated. Bioplasm,  obtained  otherwise  than  from 
pre-existing  bioplasm,  must  be  compounded  or  at 
least  shown  to  exist,  for  until  that  is  done  Science 
has  not  solved  the  problem  of  life.  Anything 
short  of  this  is  but  to  trace  living  matter  to  pre- 


130  LIFE. 

existing  living  matter  for  its  origin,  and  thus  to 
go  from  one  member  of  an  infinite  series  to 
another  without  coming  any  nearer  to  the  crucial 
question  as  to  how  life  came  to  exist  in  the  first 
member  of  the  series.  That  life  comes  from 
pre-existing  life  we  know  ;  experience  everywhere 
teaches  that  fact,  and  every  experiment  hitherto 
made  has  but  served  to  establish  the  dictum  that 
life  has  and  can  come  alone  from  pre-existing  life. 
Until  it  can  be  shown  that  certain  elements  united 
in  a  certain  way,  until  it  can  be  shown  that  when 
matter  is  brought  into  certain  relations  and  sub- 
mitted to  certain  conditions,  life  is  the  result, 
then  and  not  till  then  is  the  task  achieved.  But 
I  need  hardly  tell  you  that  this  has  proven  the 
most  difficult  task  of  all.  So  far,  at  least,  every 
attempt  at  the  production  of  living  matter  has 
culminated  in  absolute  failure,  and  from  the  nature 
of  the  case,  all  such  attempts  in  the  future  must 
meet  with  the  same  result.  Out  of  the  secret 
chambers  in  which  the  mysteries  of  life  are  con- 
cealed there  comes  a  voice  that  speaks  to  experi- 
mental science  and  says,  "  Hitherto  shalt  thou 
come,  but  no  further." 

But  look  now  at  what  has  been  the  historv  of 


LIFE.  131 

the  attempts  at  the  production  of  living  matter. 
When  it  was  found  that  the  bioplasm  of  all  living 
structures  was  identical,  then  the  task  of  produc- 
ing bioplasm  was  attempted.  The  first  attempt 
was  made  by  the  chemical  method.  It  seemed 
probable  that  if  bioplasm  or  living  matter  could 
be  analyzed,  and  its  formula  once  determined, 
that  then  by  a  synthetic  process  its  elements 
could  be  combined,  and  thus  living  matter  be 
produced.  The  work  was  begun.  In  more  than  a 
hundred  laboratories  something  analogous  to  that 
wonderful  substance  which  has  power  to  change 
the  non-living  into  the  living,  that  builds  up  the 
wondrous  structures  of  bone  and  muscle  and  fibre, 
was  compounded.  So  far  as  the  most  delicate 
tests  could  show,  this  artificial  substance  was  pre- 
cisely the  same  as  that  produced  in  the  laboratory 
of  Nature  ;  it  seemed  to  be  the  same  as  the  bio- 
plasm which  pre-existing  bioplasm  produced.  But 
when  thus  artificially  produced,  one  thing  was 
lacking  —  the  substance  did  not  live.  Persistently 
life  refused  to  be  associated  with  it.  It  might  be 
subjected  to  the  most  favorable  conditions,  but  it 
still  remained  as  its  elements  had  been  before, 
simply  dead    matter.     Abortive   as  were    the   at- 


132  LIFE. 

tempts  of  the  ancient  alchemists  to  produce  the 
philosopher's  stone,  so  also  has  been  every 
attempt  to  wed  the  mysterious  forces  of  life  with 
artificial  protoplasm.  And  thus  out  of  these 
repeated  failures  it  has  come  to  be  recognized  by 
biologists  that  by  no  process  is  it  possible  to  pro- 
duce living  matter.  A  material  similar  to  that 
with  which  life  has  once  been  associated,  or  if 
you  please,  the  dead  matter  of  a  once  living  organ- 
ism, may  be  compounded  by  the  chemist.  He 
can  produce  a  substance  in  character  and  in  com- 
position precisely  similar  to  the  substance  which 
once  lived,  but  a  living  substance  no  man  can 
produce  ;  for,  observe  :  that  what  a  mass  of  proto- 
plasm is  composed  of  when  vitality  has  ceased  to 
exist  in  it,  is  quite  a  different  question  from  the 
one  as  to  what  such  protoplasm  was  composed  of 
while  possessing  vitality.  Matter  that  once  lived 
may  be  analyzed  and  then  imitated  ;  but  matter 
in  the  living  state  cannot  be  analyzed,  for  to  ana- 
lyze it  is  to  destroy  its  life  and  leave  it  no  longer 
living  matter. 

You  see,  then,  the  cause  of  the  failure  hitherto 
in  tlie  pioduction  of  living  matter,  and  can  under- 
stand how  it  must  be  that  the  same  cause  beinsr 


LIFE.  133 

as  it  shall  be  ever  present,  must  ever  stand  in  the 
way  of  every  attempt  to  get  at  the  origin  of  life 
by  the  experimental  method  ;  for  it  is  evident  that 
if  living  matter  cannot  be  analyzed  then  neither 
can  it  be  compounded. 

Open  here  Beale's  work  on  Bioplasm  and  read 
what  this  foremost  investigator  has  to  say  on  the 
subject  of  living  matter  as  compared  with  the  dead 
matter  with  which  life  has  once  been  associated. 
These  are  his  words:  ''When  the  life  of  a  mass 
of  bioplasm  of  any  kind  has  once  been  cut  short, 
lifeless  substances  having  similar  properties  result. 
When  a  mass  of  bioplasm  dies,  it  is  resolved  into 
fibrine,  albumen,  fatty  matter  and  salts.  These 
things  do  not  exist  in  the  matter  when  it  is  bio- 
plasm, but  as  the  latter  dies  it  splits  up  into  these 
four  classes  of  compounds." 

Read  also  his  testimony  in  his  work  on  "  How 
to  Work  with  the  Microscope:"  "Authority 
may  continue  to  refuse  to  admit,  or  may  deem  it 
expedient  to  deny  that  the  living  state  differs 
absolutely  and  entirely  from  the  non-living  condi- 
tion, but  the  truth  remains  that  in  the  living  state 
of  matter,  whether  in  the  living  matter  of  the 
growing    fungus,    or    that    concerned    in    mental 


134  LIFE. 

action,  material  forces  and  properties  are  some- 
how governed  and  controlled,  and  in  a  manner  not 
to  be  imitated  by  us,  or  to  be  explained  by  any- 
thing known  concerning  non-living  matter,  while 
it  is  incontestable  that  the  moment  the  matter 
ceases  to  live,  its  capacity  for  manifesting  its  ordi- 
nary properties  returns."  Let  me  ask  you  not  to 
overlook  one  very  significant  phrase  in  that  state- 
ment of  Dr.  Beale's.  It  is  the  one  in  which  he 
affirms  that  in  ''living  matter  material  forces  and 
properties  are  somehow  governed  and  controlled, 
and  in  a  manner  not  to  be  imitated  by  us."  It 
has  now  been  well-nigh  ten  years  since  Dr.  Beale 
penned  those  words.  To  materialistic  thinkers  — to 
those  who  affirmed  that  living  matter  could  be 
successfully  imitated,  they  doubtless  sounded  like 
an  ominous  prophecy.  But  that  prophecy  has  not 
yet  been  impeached,  nor  from  the  very  nature  of 
the  case  will  it  ever  be.  Even  before  Beale, 
Fletcher  had  made  statements  precisely  similar. 
"■  It  seems  probable,"  says  Fletcher,  "■  that  during 
this  temporary  living  state  the  elements  do  not 
exist  in  a  state  of  ordinary  chemical  combination 
at  all  ;  these  ordinary  attractions  or  affinities  seem 
to  be  suspended  for  the  time.     And  again,  "To 


LIFE.  135 

assert  that  living  matter  is  'protein  '  or  'albumen  ' 
is  to  assert  that  which  never  has  been  or  can  be 
proved,  and  all  arguments  based  upon  such  asser- 
tions must  be  discarded." 

And  thus  the  attempt  to  get  the  living  out  of 
the  dead,  at  least  by  the  chemical  method,  accord- 
ing to  the  testimony  of  the  foremost  biologists  of 
the  present  must  be  abandoned.  More  than  a 
quarter  of  a  century  ago  it  was  held  by  the  best 
thinkers  that  living  matter  was  matter  in  a  state 
utterly  siii  generis.  And  the  correctness  of  that 
judgment  is  now  but  demonstrated  since  men  have 
been  looking  more  profoundly  into  the  question. 
The  verdict  therefore  of  biology  as  it  is  now  given 
is  this  :  Life  is  not  the  result  or  outcome  of  ma- 
terial elements  united  in  any  known  way,  but  is 
the  product  of  pre-existing  life.  Or  as  Virchow 
has  since  put  it,  Oninis  cellida  e  cellida.  That  propo- 
sition, first  affirmed  by  Schleiden,  and  re-affirmed 
by  Remak  and  Virchow,  stands  as  the  fundamental 
principle  upon  which  the  science  of  biology  to-day 
rests. 

Well  now  since  the  chemical  method  has  so 
utterly  broken  down,  and  the  impossibility  of 
getting  at  the  origin  of  life  by  that  method  has 


13^  LIFE. 

been  demonstrated,  in  despair,  a  few  of  the  more 
rabid  materialists  have  turned  backward  and  are 
now  making  an  attempt  to  bring  forward  an  old 
hypothesis.  I  speak  of  the  hypothesis  known  by 
the  title  "  spontaneous  generation."  But  in  view 
of  what  has  just  been  said,  I  think  I  shall  not  need 
to  dwell  long  in  order  to  show  the  error  inherent 
in  this  revived  hypothesis.  For  you  can  easily  see 
that  the  facts  operating  against  the  evolution  of 
life  by  the  chemical  method,  must  also  operate 
against  its  evolution  by  the  supposed  processes  of 
spontaneous  generation.  For,  after  all,  spontane- 
ous generation  is  but  an  assigning  to  Nature  the 
task  of  producing  life  by  the  same  methods  and 
out  of  the  same  materials  which  have  so  often 
failed  in  the  hands  of  the  chemist.  What  man 
cannot  do  by  the  use  of  certain  laws  and  methods, 
this  hypothesis  affirms  that  Nature  has  done  by 
precisely  the  same  laws  and  methods. 

And  yet,  strange  as  it  may  seem,  out  of  an  un- 
willingness to  face  the  conclusions  which  Biology 
to-day  forces  upon  the  materialistic  thinkers  of  our 
times,  this  ghost  of  the  seventeenth  century  is 
a^cain  brou^cht  forward  into  the  arena  of  scientific 
combat,  in  the  vain  hope  that  it  may  do  service  in 
the  present  extremity. 


LIFE.  137 

Astounding,  in  view  of  what  is  now  known  con- 
cerning life,  is  the  statement  of  Dr.  Bastian,  in  his 
"  Beginnings  of  Life "  Here  are  his  words : 
*•  Both  observation  and  experiment  unmistakably 
testify  to  the  fact  that  living  matter  is  continually 
being  formed  de  ?tovo,  in  obedience  to  the  same 
laws  and  tendencies  which  determine  all  the  more 
simple  chemical  combinations." 

Now,  instead  of  observation  and  experiment  un- 
mistakably testifying  to  that  assumption,  they 
unmistakably  and  unqualifiedly  testify  to  directly 
the  contrary.  But  let  me  tell  you  here  how  Dr. 
Bastian  came  to  make  this  assumption,  in  order 
that  you  may  the  better  know  precisely  what  esti- 
mate you  are  to  put  upon  it.  Taking  an  infusion 
of  hay  or  of  other  organic  matter  known  to  con- 
tain living  germs,  he  put  it  into  glass  vessels 
which  he  then  hermetically  sealed  so  as  to  exclude 
all  outer  air.  These  vessels  with  their  contents, 
were  then  subjected  to  the  boiling  temperature 
for  several  hours  ;  until  as  he  supposed  every  germ 
had  become  lifeless.  The  contents  of  the  vessels, 
were  then  examined  under  the  microscope,  and 
living  bacteria  were  found.  And  so  when  Dr. 
Bastian  found  these  myriad  forms  of  life  in  the 


138  LIFE. 

water  which  he  supposed  had  been  rendered  sterile, 
he  reasoned  that  inasmuch  as  all  former  life  had 
been  destroyed,  the  life  which  was  now  present 
could  be  accounted  for  alone  on  the  supposition 
that  it  was  spontaneously  produced.  As  a  deduc- 
tion from  these  experiments  he  made  the  assertion 
to  which  I  have  called  your  attention. 

But  now  if  you  remember  that  the  temperature 
at  which  all  germs  are  certainly  destroyed  has  not 
yet  been  fixed,  and  that  many  are  capable  of  sus- 
taining a  temperature  much  above  that  of  boiling 
water,  you  can  see  how  presumptuous  a  statement 
such  as  that  must  be.  And  when  you  also  bear 
in  mind  the  difficulty  involved  in  effectually  pre- 
venting germs  from  coming  in  contact  with  the 
water  even  after  it  had  been  rendered  sterile,  you 
will  be  prepared  to  accept  all  such  statements  as 
these  with  the  largest  grains  of  allowance,  as  well 
as  perceive  how  Dr.  Bastian  was  liable  to  come  to 
his  erroneous  conclusion.  His  error  was  pointed 
out  by  Professor  Tyndall.  Repeating  the  experi- 
ment with  the  hay  infusion,  with  greater  precau- 
tions, and  with  far  more  manipulative  skill,  Pro- 
fessor Tyndall  showed  that  all  that  Bastian  had 
said    was    without    foundatiun.      lie     proved    that 


LIFE.  139 

when  the  proper  precautions  were  observed  to 
destroy  the  germs  in  the  glass  vessel,  not  a  vestige 
of  life  appeared  in  the  fluid  when  afterward  ex- 
amined. And  though  acknowledging  his  own 
regret  at  the  results  of  his  experiments,  this  is  his 
conclusion,  stated  in  his  own  words  :  ''  I  affirm 
that  no  shred  of  trustworthy  experimental  testi- 
mony exists  to  prove  that  life  in  our  day  has  ever 
appeared  independently  of  antecedent  life."  Read 
also  the  article  on  Biology,  written  by  Professor 
Huxley,  in  the  Encyclopasdia  Britannica,  and  when 
you  have  read  it  put  it  here  over  against  the  state- 
ment of  Dr.  Bastian's  :  "That  living  matter  is 
constantly  being  formed  de  novo  in  obedience  to 
the  same  laws  and  tendencies  which  determine  all 
the  more  simple  chemical  combinations."  These 
are  Professor  Huxley's  words  :  ''  Not  only  is  the 
kind  of  evidence  adduced  in  favor  of  spontaneous 
generation  logically  insufficient  to  furnish  proof  of 
its  occurrence,  but  it  may  be  stated  as  a  well- 
based  induction,  that  the  more  careful  the  investi- 
gator and  the  more  complete  his  mastery  over  the 
endless  practical  difficulties  which  surround  ex- 
perimentation on  this  subject,  the  more  certain 
are  his  experiments  to  give  negative  results,  while 


140  LIFE. 

positive  results  are    no   less    sure   to    crown    the 
efforts  of  the  clumsy  and  the  careless." 

Such,  then,  is  the  attitude  of  the  more  careful 
and  far-sighted  of  modern  biologists  toward  the 
theory  of  spontaneous  generation.  As  a  theory 
of  life  it  has  been  proven  inadequate,  and  as  a  fact, 
it  exists  not  in  Nature.  But  it  is  not  my  purpose  to 
speak  lightly  of  experimental  science.  In  view  of 
what  it  has  achieved  no  man  can  speak  in  terms 
of  disrespect  in  regard  to  it  without  belittling  and 
stultifying  himself.  We  have  done  too  much  of 
that  already.  In  many  things  it  is  true  she  has 
failed.  On  many  of  the  more  important  and  vexed 
questions  that  concern  us  she  has  not  given  us 
the  light  which  we  hoped  and  perhaps  expected 
her  to  give  ;  but  we  must  not  expect  the  impos- 
sible. Neither  must  we  forget  that  experimental 
science  has  not  yet  given  us  a  theory  of  life  that 
will  stand  the  test.  At  one  time  it  offered  the 
physical  theory,  and  said  that  life  was  the  out- 
come of  material  elements  united  in  certain  pro 
portions  and  under  certain  conditions.  To-day, 
retracting  its  former  statement,  it  declares  that 
theory  unscientific  and  in  no  wise  capable  of 
solving  the  problem  of  life. 


LIFE.  141 

Again  in  the  hypothesis  of  spontaneous  genera- 
tion, a  new  theory  of  life  was  proposed.  But  when 
it  came  to  testing  this  theory  by  the  very  experi- 
ments which  should  have  given  positive  results,  it 
too  broke  down,  and  to-day  discarded  by  respect- 
able scientists  everywhere,  it  has  already  been 
withdrawn.  We  are  left  therefore  without  a 
theory  of  life,  at  least  from  the  scientific  side. 
But  while  experimental  science  has  given  us  no 
theory  of  life,  its  efforts  at  the  solution  of  the 
problem  have  not  been  in  vain.  Out  of  these 
years  of  scientific  investigation  two  principles  far- 
reachins:  in  their  sisrnificance  have  forever  been 
established.     Those  principles  are  these  :  — 

First,  all  life  in  the  present  world  is  to  be 
traced  to  pre-existing  life. 

Second,  life  is  not  the  result  of  a  gradual  devel- 
opment or  passage  of  the  non-living  into  the 
living. 

It  would  be  impossible  within  our  prescribed 
limits  to  array  the  testimony  at  present  given  on 
the  side  of  the  first  proposition.  On  its  side 
stand  men  like  Louis  Agassiz,  Virchow,  Elam, 
Tyndall,  Dawson,  Dana,  and  a  host  of  others  whose 
names  stand  brisfhtest  in  the  constellation  of  modern 


142  LIFE. 

scientific  thinkers.  In  the  significant  words  of 
Professor  Huxley  it  may  be  said,  "The  doctrine 
of  biogenesis,  or  life  from  life,  is  victorious  along 
the  whole  line  at  the  present  day." 

But  none  the  less  positive  is  the  testimony  on 
the  side  of  the  second  proposition.  Turn  again  to 
Lionel  Beale  and  read  his  testimony  on  this  point : 
"  There  is  no  transition  from  the  non-living  into 
the  living  state,  but  matter  passes  suddenly  from 
one  state  into  the  other.  Neither  is  there  in  any 
case  a  gradation  from  any  form  of  non-living 
matter." 

Again  in  his  work  on  Protoplasm  you  have  this 
statement  :  "  The  ultimate  particles  of  matter 
pass  from  the  lifeless  into  the  living  state,  and 
from  the  latter  into  the  dead  state  suddenly. 
Matter  cannot  be  said  to  half  live  or  half  die.  It 
is  either  dead  or  living,  animate  or  inanimate,  and 
formed  matter  has  ceased  to  live. 

Well,  now  you  see  the  shape  in  which  the 
problem  relating  to  the  origin  of  life  to-day  stands, 
and  how  near  Science  has  come  to  its  solution. 
It  is  true  that  so  far  at  least  the  results  have  in 
the  main  been  negative,  and  the  origin  of  life  has 
not  yet  been  shown  by  experimental  science.     But 


LIFE.  143 

the  investigation  of  the  problem  has  also  had  its 
positive  side.  For  having  searched  in  vain  the 
fields  of  the  natural,  Science  to-day  stands  in 
devoiitcr  attitude  than  ever  before,  and  in  answer 
to  our  question,  "  Whence  came  life  ? "  points  her 
finger  toward  the  unseen.  It  is  certain  that  life 
is  here.  As  a  factor  of  the  present  world,  its 
presence  is  to  be  accounted  for. 

Scientifically  it  is  equally  certain  that  there  was 
a  time  when  in  this  world  life  was  not.  Silently 
the  globe  wheeled  its  flight  through  space,  when 
throughout  its  mighty  chambers  no  life  of  spore 
or  monad  was  present.  Over  the  mighty  empires 
of  the  earth  now  teeming  with  life  and  movement, 
Death  reigned  as  universal  king.  But  life  now  is 
here  ;  in  rayless  ocean  depths,  on  Alpine  peaks 
amid  eternal  snows,  on  every  shore  and  beyond 
every  circle,  yea,  even  in  the  empty  air  the  hum 
of  Nature's  industry  is  heard.  But  whence  came 
life  }  Before  you  answer  that  question,  let  me 
ask  you  not  to  lose  sight  of  those  two  propo- 
sitions which  are  to-day  affirmed  by  the  foremost 
biologists  :  — 

First,  that  all  life  in  the  present  world  is  to  be 
referred  to  pre-existent  life. 


144  LIFE. 

Second,  that  life  is  not  the  result  of  a  gradual 
development  or  passage  of  the  non-living  into  the 
living  ;  and  with  these  propositions,  wrought  out 
in  the  heat  of  well-nigh  a  century's  investigation 
before  your  mind,  answer  me  the  question,  Whence 
came  life  ?  It  was  not  here  once.  In  the  gaseous 
state  of  the  infant  world  life  could  not  exist.  It  has 
been  an  after  product.  It  came  in  the  fullness  of 
time.  But  whence,  and  how  }  It  will  not  help 
you  to  say  with  Sir  William  Thompson,  that  the 
germs  of  living  matter  have  come  to  our  globe 
borne  on  the  shoulders  of  some  meteor  or  frag- 
ment of  some  other  world.  That  assumption  but 
shifts  the  difficulty  without  solving  the  question. 
For  how  came  life  to  these  other  worlds  }  Like 
ours,  they  too  have  once  been  in  a  gaseous  state, 
and  with  such  a  state  life,  whether  here  or  there, 
is  incompatible.  Trace  life,  if  you  please,  from 
this  world  to  another,  and  from  that  back  again  to 
another,  and  so  on  until  you  have  swept  the  gal- 
axies, and  at  last  you  will  be  left  standing  on  the 
verge  of  the  same  chasm  that  confronted  you  in 
this  —  the  chasm  that  yawns  between  the  living 
and  the  non-living,  and  that  somewhere  and  some- 
how has  been  crossed. 


LIFE.  145 

This  side  of  that  chasm  is  the  natural  ;  the 
other  side  is  the  spiritual ;  this  side  is  the  seen  ; 
the  other  side  is  the  unseen  ;  this  is  the  temporal, 
that  the  eternal.  What  if  experimental  science 
cannot  show  us  how  that  chasm  was  crossed  and 
life  brought  from  the  other  side  to  this  ?  That  it 
has  been  passed  is  certain  ;  that  it  could  not  have 
been  passed  without  the  intervention  of  a  divine 
hand  is  the  conclusion  to  which  the  more  recent  in- 
vestigations in  biology  unmistakably  point.  Face 
to  face  with  that  conclusion,  accepting  it  as  the 
necessary  result  of  the  most  careful  and  accurate 
scientific  investigation,  stand  Elam  and  Dawson 
and  Agassiz  and  Carpenter  and  Lionel  Beale. 
With  him  who  aforetime  saw  the  heavens  opened, 
these  unite  in  testifying  that,  ''  In  Him  was  life." 
If  life  in  the  world  was  not ;  if  life  comes  alone 
from  pre-existing  life,  then  does  it  follow  that  the 
life  that  now  is  has  been  communicated  to  the  non- 
living by  Him  who  hath  life  in  Himself.  That 
One  who  lives,  and  shall  live  forevermore. 


THE   BRAIN. 

If  a  man  die,  shall  he  live  again  ?  —  Job. 


THE    BRAIN. 

Shall  it  be  with  me  as  it  is  with  the  brute  ? 
When  the  extinguisher  is  put  down  on  the  lamp 
here,  shall  my  life,  as  its,  go  out  in  everlasting 
night  ?  or  shall  my  lamp,  after  the  extinguisher  is 
down  upon  it  here,  gleam  on  in  a  richer  brightness 
there  ?  Not  if  materialism  is  true.  If  there  is 
nothing  of  me  but  bone  and  muscle  and  fiber  and 
cell,  then  when  these  are  destroyed,  as  they  shall 
be  by  death,  all  is  destroyed,  and  I  hope  in  vain 
for  a  life  beyond.  But  if  there  is  something 
within  me  that  is  independent  of  bone  and  fiber 
and  muscle  and  cell,  then  when  these  decay,  as 
they  shall,  that  something  may  live  on. 

Until  quite  recently,  no  affirmative  answer  could 
scientifically  be  given  to  our  question  regarding 
man's  immortality.  But  the  answer  that  Science 
now  gives  is  more  than  a  qualified  affirmative. 
One  thing  at  least  is  certain.  If  the  soul  is  inde- 
pendent of  the  body  here,  it  may  be  hereafter. 
If  the  musician  is  not  a  part  of  the  instrument, 

149 


ISO  THE  BRAIN. 

then  the  destruction  of  the  instrument  cannot  be 
the  destruction  of  the  musician.  And  if  the  soul 
plays  on  the  fibers  and  cells  of  the  brain  as  the 
musician  does  on  the  instrument,  then  the  soul  is 
independent  of  these  fibers  and  cells,  just  as  the 
musician  is  independent  of  the  instrument.  And 
if  the  destruction  of  the  instrument  is  not  the 
destruction  of  the  musician,  then  the  destruction 
of  these  fibers  and  cells  at  death  is  not  the 
destruction  of  the  soul. 

It  is  apparent,  therefore,  that  the  question  as  to 
the  separate  existence  of  the  body  and  the  soul  in 
the  present  state  bears  most  intimately  on  the 
question  of  our  immortality.  If  the  soul  in  the 
present  state  maintains  a  separate  existence,  then 
is  the  relation  which  the  body  sustains  to  it  not 
an  essential  one.  The  question,  then,  for  us  to 
answer  is.  Does  the  soul  even  in  the  present  state 
maintain  such  a  separate  existence  .^  Does  it  play 
on  the  fibers  and  cells  of  the  brain  as  the  musi- 
cian does  on  the  instrument  ?  If  it  does,  then  it 
cannot  be  a  part  of  the  body,  and  must  be  inde- 
pendent of  it. 

In  his  work  on  "Mind  and  Body,"  Professor 
Alexander  Bain  makes  this  si-'iiificant  admission  : 


THE   BRAIN.  151 

that  there  is  no  intrinsic  improbability  attaching 
to  the  supposition  that  the  mind  may  exist  alto- 
gether distinct  from  the  body.  Martensen,  one 
of  the  most  learned  and  careful  of  German  writers, 
in  the  first  volume  of  his  **  Christian  Dogmatics," 
says,  "  In  certain  states  of  ecstasy  and  of  vision, 
there  appears  for  the  moment  a  separation  of 
the  soul  from  the  body,  an  existence  apart  from 
the  body,  in  which  the  soul  is  not  absolutely  with- 
out the  body  and  without  nature,  but  lives  in  a 
manner  free  of  the  body  and  of  nature  ;  and  this 
may  be  described  as  a  type  or  anticipation  of  its 
state  after  death."  Archbishop  Manning,  cited 
with  approval  by  Dr.  Carpenter,  says,  "There  is 
still  another  faculty,  and  more  than  this  another 
agent,  distinct  from  the  thinking  brain." 

And  thus  in  the  estimation  of  some  of  the  most 
far-sighted  and  trustworthy  thinkers,  it  appears  at 
least  probable  that  the  soul  may  have  an  exist- 
ence independent  of  the  body  even  here.  But  in 
regard  to  a  question  so  far-reaching  in  its  con- 
sequences, we  cannot  rest  satisfied  with  mere 
probabilities.  Realizing  that  our  hold  on  this  life 
is  gradually  yet  certainly  losing  as  the  years  rush 
on,  drawing  nearer  and    nearer  to  the   darkness, 


15^  THE  BRAIN. 

knowing  that  shortly  we  must  feel  the  touch  of 
its  dampness  upon  the  cheek,  we  would  be  certain 
if  possible  as  to  whither  we  are  going.  One  thing 
we  know.  If  the  soul  is  independent  of  the  body 
here  it  may  be  hereafter.  If  it  is  not  —  if  it  is 
dependent  on  fiber  and  cell  —  then  so  far  as  Sci- 
ence can  show,  we  must  be  content  to  enter  the 
darkness  with  the  bandage  upon  our  eyes.  It 
shall  be  our  purpose  in  the  present  discussion,  to 
look  at  the  physical  basis  on  which  our  hopes  of 
immortality  are  grounded,  in  order  that  we  may 
see  in  how  far  those  hopes  are  consistent  with 
well-established  physical  facts. 

Before,  however,  we  are  prepared  to  investigate 
this  subject  in  its  scientific  light,  or  are  qualified 
to  estimate  the  bearing  which  the  results  of  mod- 
ern investigation  have  upon  it,  we  must  make  our- 
selves acquainted  with  the  material  mechanism 
concerned  in  action  and  thought.  Before  the 
musician  can  produce  harmony,  he  must  have 
the  instrument.  But  as  an  inspection  of  the 
instrument  and  a  study  of  the  arrangement  and 
relation  of  its  various  parts  will  let  us  into  the 
secret  of  how  harmony  may  be  produced  when  its 
keys  are  pressed  by  the  fingers  of  the  musician, 


THE  BRAIN.  153 

SO  will  an  inspection  of  the  anatomy  of  the  brain 
and  the  nervous  system  of  man  let  us  into  the 
secret  of  how  mental  and  physical  action  may  be 
accounted  for. 

With  the  most  recent  works  on  physiology  and 
histology  open  before  us,  let  us  seek  an  answer  to 
the  three  following  questions  :  How  are  vol- 
untary and  involuntary  motion  to  be  explained  ? 
How  is  brain  activity  to  be  accounted  for?  How 
explain  the  phenomenon  of  memory  ? 

That  the  fibers  and  cells  of  the  brain  and  ner- 
vous system  are  the  material  elements  concerned 
in  the  production  of  each  of  these  phenomena,  I 
shall  not  occupy  your  time  in  proving.  How  they 
do  their  work,  how  by  their  action  and  reaction 
the  phenomena  already  named  are  produced,  these 
are  the  questions  that  shall  concern  us. 

To  begin,  therefore,  let  us  study  for  a  moment 
one  of  these  single  nerve  fibers.  If  we  were  to 
dissect  any  part  of  the  body  under  the  micro- 
scope, we  would  find  it  filled  with  silvery  threads 
of  various  size,  ranging  in  thickness  from  one- 
fifteenth-hundredth  to  one-twelve-thousandth  of 
an  inch  in  diameter,  the  medium  or  average  thick- 
ness beino-  about  one-six-thousandth  of   an    inch. 


154  THE   BRAIN. 

These  little  threads  are  the  nerve  fibers.  If  you 
were  to  take  the  pains  to  examine  one  of  them 
with  a  high  magnifying  power,  and  after  it  had 
been  so  prepared  as  to  show  its  true  character, 
you  would  find  it  to  be  made  up  of  three  parts  : 
an  outer  structureless  membrane ;  an  interior 
layer  of  fatty  matter  ;  a  central  core  or  cylinder  of 
albuminous  matter.  This  central  core,  or  "axis," 
as  it  is  called,  is  the  important  part  of  the  fiber, 
the  two  envelopes  serving,  so  far  as  is  known,  no 
other  purpose  than  that  of  a  sheath  for  the  pro- 
tection of  the  delicate  axis,  and  affording  a  means 
of  insulating  one  fiber  from  another.  If  now  you 
were  to  carefully  trace  one  of  these  fibers  from  its 
outer  terminus  under  the  skin  inward,  to  all  ap- 
pearance it  would  grow  larger  and  larger  as  it 
approaches  the  nerve  centres,  just  as  the  roots 
of  a  tree  seem  to  grow  larger  as  they  approach 
the  trunk,  on  account  of  the  accumulation  of 
smaller  roots  and  rootlets.  And  yet  if  you  were 
to  examine  more  closely  you  would  find  that  in- 
stead of  uniting  with  other  fibers,  as  it  seems  to 
do,  each  fiber  remains  separate  from  every  other 
fiber  and  runs  from  its  outer  terminus  inward, 
without    uniting  with   any   otlicr   until    it  reaches 


THE   BRAIN.  155 

the  brain.  And  thus  you  see  that  each  fiber  is 
able  to  carry  any  impression  that  it  may  receive 
directly  to  the  brain.  If  you  were  standing  in 
the  Western  Union  Telegraph  Office  in  New  York 
City,  where  there  are  scores  of  wires  running  out 
in  every  direction,  and  would  suppose  for  a  moment 
that  each  wire  was  put  there  for  the  single  purpose 
of  connecting  New  York  directly  with  other  points, 
you  perceive  that  each  wire  would  then  bring  its 
own  distinct  message.  That  from  Chicago  would 
bring  one,  that  from  Washington  and  Boston 
each  another,  and  so  on.  Thus  news  could  be 
sent  from  any  part  of  the  country  directly  to 
New  York,  because  wires  run  from  that  city  to 
every  point.  Now  in  something  after  the  same 
manner,  each  nerve  fiber  carries  its  own  sensation 
to  the  brain. 

Those  fibers  having  their  outer  terminus  in 
the  eye  carry  to  the  brain  impressions  of  sight. 
Those  terminating  in  the  ear  bring  to  the  brain 
impressions  of  sound.  If  I  touch  my  desk  with 
a  finger  of  my  right  hand,  a  certain  nerve  or  set 
of  nerves  carries  the  impression  immediately  to 
the  great  nerve  centre.  If  I  touch  it  with  a  fin- 
ger of  the  left  hand,  another  set  of  nerves  carries 


156  THE  BR  Am. 

the  impression  inward.  And  so  with  any  part  of 
the  body  ;  when  any  part  is  touched  or  affected  in 
any  way,  certain  nerves  immediately  transmit  the 
impression  to  the  brain. 

Now  it  is  important  that  you  should  remember 
that  there  are  two  kinds  of  nerve  fibers  :  the 
afferent,  or  those  passing  toward  the  nerve  cen- 
tres, and  the  efferent,  or  those  passing  from  the 
nerve  centres. 

It  is  important  that  you  should  distinguish  be- 
tween these,  because  the  functions  which  they 
perform  are  vastly  different.  The  afferent  nerves 
are  the  nerves  of  sensation.  All  sensations  are 
transmitted  by  means  of  the  afferent  nerves.  If 
they  were  destroyed,  all  impressions  would  also 
cease  to  be  given.  You  could  then  see  nothing, 
hear  nothing,  feel  nothing,  in  short  could  have  no 
knowledge  whatever  of  the  external  world  ;  for  it 
is  on  these  afferent  nerves,  carrying  as  they  do 
impressions  from  without  inward,  that  our  knowl- 
edge of  the  external  world  depends.  But  the 
efferent  nerves  proceed  from  within  outward,  and 
as  we  have  already  learned,  perform  a  very  differ- 
ent function.  These  are  the  nerves  of  motion. 
When   I   move  my  arm,  or  walk  across  the  room. 


THE  BRAIN.  157 

or  engage  in  any  form  of  bodily  activity,  the 
motion  is  produced  by  these  efferent  nerves,  and 
without  them  I  would  be  capable  of  no  activity 
whatever. 

Well,  now,  let  us  examine  the  outer  extremity 
of  one  of  these  afferent  nerves,  which  we  said 
was  the  nerve  of  sensation.  Near  its  outer  ter- 
mination and  immediately  beneath  the  point  at 
which  the  impression  is  given,  the  axis,  or  that 
part  of  the  fiber  which  we  said  a  moment  ago 
was  the  essential  part  of  the  fiber,  escapes  from 
its  sheath  and  divides  itself  into  the  minut- 
est threads,  forming  a  most  complex  network. 
These  threads  are  so  great  in  number,  and  so 
completely  penetrate  every  portion  near  the  sur- 
face of  the  body,  that  no  part,  however  small, 
is  untraversed  by  them.  It  is  impossible  to  punc- 
ture the  skin  even  with  the  finest  needle  with- 
out touching  the  expanded  axis  of  some  nerve 
fiber. 

Let  us  now  trace  one  of  these  fibers  —  say  one 
from  the  finger  here,  inward.  You  will  find  it 
soon  apparently  uniting  with  other  fibers  as  it 
approaches  the  nerve  centre  here  in  the  spinal 
cord.     Entering  the  spinal  cord  it  touches  a  cell. 


158  THE  BRAIN. 

We  shall  speak  of  these  cells  further  on.  This 
much,  however,  ought  at  this  place  to  be  said, — 
the  moment  the  nervous  force  set  into  operation 
by  a  sensation  touches  the  cell,  it  is  magnified  or 
intensified,  and  is  thus  able  to  perform  the  work 
of  stimulating  more  properly  the  efferent  nerve 
with  which  it  here  comes  in  contact.  Now  the 
nerve  that  we  have  been  tracing  is,  as  we  said,  a 
nerve  of  sensation.  It  carries  the  sensation  to 
the  cell  here.  But  notice  here  something  else. 
From  this  same  cell  there  runs  an  efferent  nerve 
back  to  the  muscles.  This  efferent  nerve,  you 
will  remember,  is  the  nerve  that  produces  motion. 
You  see  that  we  have  here  now  three  things : 
the  nerve  carrying  the  sensation  to  the  cell  ;  the 
nerve  of  motion  running  from  the  cell  to  the 
muscles,  and  the  cell  itself. 

Let  us  now  see,  if  we  can,  how  motion  is  pro- 
duced by  the  action  of  this  threefold  mechanism. 
Let  us  say  now,  that  inadvertently  I  touch  my 
finger  to  the  sharp  point  of  a  needle  or  to  some 
heated  surface.  By  that  action  a  stimulus  is 
given  to  the  afferent  nerve  running  to  the  cell. 
Here  the  stimulus,  intensified  by  the  cell,  now 
stimulates    in    its  turn  the  nerve  running  to  the 


THE   BRAIN.  159 

muscles,  causing  them  to  contract,  and  as  a  result 
my  hand  is  withdrawn.  This  is  called  automatic 
action,  for  you  perceive  that  in  the  act  of  with- 
drawing my  hand  my  will  is  not  called  into  oper- 
ation ;  that  act  is  performed  indeed  before  I  am 
aware  of  it,  and  hence  is  called  automatic  motion, 
because  it  is  motion  independent  of  the  will,  and 
is  to  be  explained  by  the  spontaneous  action  and 
reaction  of  the  nerves  and  the  cells.  And  now  at 
this  point  I  am  anxious  that  you  should  not  over- 
look one  thing,  and  that  is  the  real  manner  in 
which  this  automatic  motion  is  produced.  What 
causes  the  automatic  motion  of  my  arm  when 
inadvertently  I  touch  my  finger  to  a  heated  sur- 
face ?  You  say  it  is  caused  by  the  contraction  of 
the  proper  muscles.  And  when  I  ask  what  caused 
the  muscular  contraction,  you  say  it  was  produced 
by  some  nervous  force  operating  along  the  nerves 
that  traverse  the  muscles,  and  thus  the  movement 
of  the  arm  is  caused  by  muscular  contraction. 
This  muscular  contraction  is  caused  by  the  ner- 
vous force  operating  along  the  nerve.  And  when 
I  ask  you  what  caused  the  nerve  thus  to  act,  you 
say  it  was  caused  by  some  stimulus.  Now  that 
is  what    I  want    you    to    remember.     It  was    the 


i6o  THE  BRAIN. 

stimulus  given  to  the  efferent  nerve  that  in  some 
manner  caused  it  to  act ;  its  action  caused  the 
contraction  of  the  muscle,  and  this  contraction 
produced  the  movement.  The  important  thing, 
then,  you  see,  is  the  stimulus  ;  for  when  you  have 
that  you  have  all  the  rest.  Well,  now,  if  you  bear 
in  mind  that  the  original  cause  of  motion  is  this 
stimulus  given  to  the  efferent  nerve,  we  are  pre- 
pared to  understand  how  voluntary  action,  as  well 
as  involuntary,  is  produced.  For  there  is  mus- 
cular motion  that  is  not  automatic.  I  can  move 
my  arm  in  any  direction  without  the  movement 
being  caused  by  some  sensation  or  stimulus  given 
from  without.  I  can  move  it  by  an  act  of  will. 
See  now  how  this  becomes  possible.  Here  is  the 
motor  nerve ;  and  we  have  just  learned  that  in 
order  that  motion  in  my  arm  be  produced,  this 
nerve  must  be  caused  to  act,  in  other  words  must 
be  stimulated.  Suppose  now,  that  instead  of  its 
being  stimulated  by  means  of  some  sensation 
brought  from  without  through  the  afferent  nerve, 
it  should  be  stimulated  from  within  along  the 
track  of  some  nerve  running  down  here  from  the 
brain,  motion  again  would  result  ;  for  the  thing 
necessary    is    simply    to    stimulate    the    nerve    of 


THE   BRAIN.  i6i 

motion  and  the  movement  is  produced.  That 
nerve  may  be  stimulated,  as  I  have  shown  you,  by 
a  sensation  from  without,  but  it  may  also  be  stim- 
ulated through  the  nerves  running  down  the  spinal 
cord,  and  in  either  case  you  have  motion.  And 
thus  you  can  see  how  it  is  possible  for  the  will 
to  operate  upon  the  body.  Affording  as  it  does 
in  some  way  a  stimulus  to  the  proper  efferent 
nerves,  it  is  possible  for  us  to  direct  the  motions 
of  the  body  and  to  accomplish  all  of  those  move- 
ments which  we  call  voluntary  movements.  Now 
it  is  not  a  part  of  our  task  at  present,  to  define 
the  nature  of  the  stimulus  by  virtue  of  which  vol- 
untary motion  is  produced.  It  is  sufficient  for 
the  present  to  show  that  such  a  stimulus  is  cer- 
tainly given  ;  and  to  call  attention  to  the  fact  that 
without  such  a  stimulus  we  could  not  possibly 
be  capable  of  voluntary  movement.  Nor  does  the 
question  specially  concern  us  as  to  how  it  comes 
that  so  small  a  stimulus  is  able  to  produce  a  force 
so  out  of  proportion  to  itself.  For  when  my  arm 
is  moved  suddenly,  the  force  of  movement  is  cer- 
tainly many  thousand  times  greater  than  the  force 
of  stimulation  could  possibly  be  ;  and  yet  if  we 
remember  that  in  the  muscles    themselves    there 


io2  THE   BRAIN. 

resides  a  vast  amount  of  potential  energy,  and 
suppose  that  the  effect  of  the  stimulus  is  simply 
to  liberate  that  energy,  we  can  account  for  the 
vast  disproportion  between  the  energy  given  off 
as  the  result  of  a  certain  stimulus,  and  the  intrin- 
sic energy  of  the  stimulus  itself. 

An  illustration  of  this  may  be  found  in  the 
steam-engine.  As  it  stands  there  at  the  station 
ready  for  its  journey,  within  its  boiler  there  resides 
a  vast  amount  of  potential  energy  —  an  energy 
which  if  called  out  is  able  to  move  the  train  of  a 
score  of  cars,  each  loaded  with  many  thousand 
pounds  of  freight.  But  when  the  throttle  is 
opened  and  motion  is  communicated  to  the  ma- 
chinery, the  force  that  is  now  put  into  operation 
is  vastly  out  of  proportion  to  the  force  exercised 
by  the  engineer  in  opening  the  throttle  ;  but  as 
the  opening  of  the  throttle  simply  served  to  liber- 
ate the  energy  resident  in  the  boiler,  so  does  the 
stimulus  given  to  the  motor  nerves  serve  but  to 
release  the  energy  resident  in  the  muscles.  The 
fact  that  such  a  stimulus  is  given,  whether  it 
comes  from  without,  as  in  the  case  of  automatic 
motion,  or  from  within,  as  in  the  case  of  volun- 
tary, this  is  the  fact  that  we  arc  now  to  bear  in 


THE   BRAIN.  163 

mind,  as  well  as  the  other,  namely  ;  that  the  very 
small  initial  force  required  for  the  change  is  just 
as  impossible  to  conceive  without  adequate  cause 
as  the  whole  force  itself  would  be. 

We  come  now  to  the  cell. 

Insignificant  as  the  cell  apparently  is,  we  must 
not  overlook  it,  for  it  performs  several  very  impor- 
tant functions. 

Two  purposes  are  served  by  the  cell.  First, 
they  unite  the  nerves  at  their  inner  termination. 
Secondly,  they  serve  the  purpose  of  magnifying 
the  impressions  given  by  the  nerves.  Suppose 
that  I  should  touch  very  lightly  a  piece  of  velvet, 
or  the  down  of  a  feather,  the  impression  would  be 
very  slight  ;  I  could  not  feel  it,  perhaps,  if  the 
sensation  were  not  magnified  or  intensified  in 
some  way.  Now  this  function  is  performed  by 
the  cell.  It  magnifies  the  faint  impressions, 
whether  made  upon  the  nerves  of  sensation,  or 
on  the  nerves  running  down  from  the  brain  to 
the  motor  nerves,  and  thus  makes  it  possible  for 
even  the  smallest  stimulus  to  accomplish  its  work. 
Like  the  nerves,  these  cells  are  made  up  of  three 
parts.  The  outside  consists  of  a  pulpy  matter. 
Inside  of  this  is  a  roundish  body  called  the  nu- 


164  THE   BRAIN. 

cleus ;   and    still    inside    of   this    are   often   to   be 
found  one  or  more  bodies  called  nuclei. 

These  cells  range  from  one-three  -hundredth 
to  one-three-thousandth  of  an  inch  in  diameter. 
Every  nerve  terminates  in  one  of  these  cells. 
Now  in  tracing  the  nerve  some  time  ago,  we 
traced  it  only  to  the  cell  here  in  the  spinal  cord  ; 
but  it  did  not  terminate  there.  Crossing  the  cell 
it  passed  upward  along  the  spinal  cord  to  the  sen- 
sorium.  This  is  called  the  sensorium  because  all 
sense  impressions  are  recorded  there.  There 
would  be  no  sensation  or  feeling  of  any  kind  if 
the  nerves  did  not  reach  this  portion  of  the  brain. 
For  instance,  if  the  spinal  cord  was  severed  here 
in  the  region  of  the  cervical  vertebra,  there  would 
be  no  sensation  in  any  of  the  parts  below  that 
point.  You  might  produce  automatic  motion  in 
the  parts  below  the  point  of  lesion  if  you  were 
to  stimulate  the  proper  nerves,  just  as  you  had 
before,  but  you  could  not  have  feeling.  The  sen- 
sorium is  the  seat  of  feeling.  It  is  in  it  that  the 
nerves  from  the  ear,  the  eye,  the  mouth  and  the 
body  all  terminate.  Had  I  a  slate  here  and  five 
of  you  were  to  write  your  different  experiences 
upon  it,  the  slate  would  serve  the  same  purpose 


THE   BRAIN.  165 

for  you  that  the  sensorium  does  for  the  five 
senses.  The  sensorium  is  the  slate  upon  which 
the  nerves  write  their  various  impressions.  Here 
the  optic,  the  olfactory,  the  auditory  and  all  the 
in-coming  nerves  record  their  impressions.  But 
now  suppose  that  after  five  of  you  had  recorded 
your  experiences  on  this  slate,  I  should  take  it  up 
in  my  hand,  read  over  what  you  had  written  and 
meditate  on  all  the  facts  recorded.  Suppose  that 
I  should  arrange  these  facts  into  some  system  ; 
notice  the  bearing  of  each  on  the  other,  and  draw 
conclusions  out  of  them,  then  I  would  perform 
the  same  labor  that  is  performed  by  the  cerebrum. 
Looking  down,  if  I  may  so  speak,  on  the  record 
as  made  by  the  senses  on  the  sensorium,  just  as  I 
would  look  at  the  writing  on  the  slate,  the  cere- 
brum takes  up  these  facts  one  by  one,  and  shapes 
them  into  ideas.  The  cerebrum,  then,  is  the  seat 
of  thought  and  ideas,  just  as  the  sensorium  is  the 
seat  of  feeling.  But  while  the  cerebrum  is  the 
seat  of  thought,  it  is  evident  that  for  the  facts 
upon  which  it  thinks,  it  is  dependent  largely  upon 
the  impressions  given  in  the  sensorium.  And 
yet  the  cerebrum  deduces  facts  and  evolves  ideas 
the  basis  of  which  were  not  given  in  the  senso- 


1 66  THE  BRAIN. 

rium.  We  have  thoughts,  conceptions  and  ideas, 
the  bases  of  which  could  not  possibly  have  been 
furnished  by  the  five  senses.  Let  us  see.  Con- 
ceive for  a  moment  that  you  knew  absolutely 
nothing-  concerning  the  world  that  lies  about  you 
—  you  are  blind  and  deaf,  cannot  taste,  smell  or 
feel.  Conceive  yourself  as  completely  shut  off 
from  the  external  world  as  is  Laura  Bridgman, 
of  whom  you  have  doubtless  read.  Suppose  now 
that  by  some  means  or  other  it  were  possible  for 
five  persons  to  inform  you  of  all  that  could  be 
seen  and  heard  and  tasted  and  felt  in  this  match- 
less world  of  ours.  One  would  tell  you  of  all 
that  could  be  seen  —  what  a  field  of  thought  would 
be  opened  for  your  meditation,  and  how  many 
ideas  would  come  that  you  had  never  had  before  ! 
Another  would  tell  you  of  all  that  could  be  heard 
through  the  ear,  of  sound  and  melody  and  human 
speech,  and  so  on  until  you  had  some  conception 
of  the  entire  range  of  human  sensuous  knowledge. 
What  a  field  would  be  opened  up  to  you  !  Now 
just  the  knowledge  that  you  would  receive  were 
your  friends  to  tell  you  of  all  that  could  be  heard 
and  tasted  and  seen  and  felt,  is  in  reality  brought 
to  you  by  the  five  sense:.     Yet  all  this  is  empiri- 


THE   BRAIN.  167 

cal  knowledge  ;  and  as  in  swift  thought  you  this 
moment  sweep  the  entire  field  of  this  empiric 
knowledge,  you  cannot  but  realize  that  it  is  but  a 
part  of  what  you  really  know.  You  have  knowl- 
edge the  basis  of  which  even  your  five  senses 
never  brought  to  you,  and  no  man  can  persuade 
you  that  your  knowledge  is  circumscribed  by  the 
narrow  limits  of  mere  sense  impressions.  Whence 
comes  your  consciousness  of  freedom  .?  Is  there 
freedom  in  nature,  and  did  you  learn  there  that 
you  were  free }  Whence  comes  your  conscious- 
ness of  responsibility  1  Did  you  learn  that  from 
nature?  Is  nature  responsible,  and  if  so,  to  whom? 
Whence  comes  your  knowledge  of  spirit,  of  the 
unseen,  and  of  God  ?  This  knowledge  comes  not 
through  the  senses.  You  never  gained  it  through 
the  eye  or  the  ear,  or  through  any  other  sense 
faculty.  What,  then,  is  the  organ  of  this  higher 
knowledge  ?  It  is  almost  universally  conceded  by 
writers  on  mental  physiology,  that  the  cerebrum 
is  the  seat  of  these  higher,  and  indeed  of  all  ideas. 
Let  me  ask  your  attention  now  for  a  moment  to 
an  examination  of  the  cerebrum,  the  seat  of  intel- 
ligence, and  to  a  study  of  that  organ  by  virtue  of 
whose   operation    all    thought    is    at    all    possible. 


1 68  THE   BRAIN. 

Immediately  within  the  skull,  from  which  it  is 
separated  by  several  thin  membranes,  lies  that 
portion  of  the  brain  known  as  the  cerebrum.  It 
is  terminated  below  by  the  cerebellum,  and  covers 
the  sensorium,  with  which  it  is  united  by  numer- 
ous nerve  fibers.  It  is  composed  of  two  sub- 
stances—  the  white  and  the  gray.  The  white 
substance  makes  up  by  far  the  greater  portion  of 
the  brain.  If  you  were  to  examine  this  white 
substance  under* the  microscope,  you  would  find  it 
made  up  of  nerve  fibers  similar  to  those  of  which 
we  spoke  a  moment  ago.  Above  this  white  sub- 
stance, lining  it  on  the  exterior,  lies  what  is  called 
the  gray  substance  of  the  brain.  This  gray  mat- 
ter is  a  mixture  of  white  fibers  with  cells.  These 
cells  imbedded  in  the  white  fibers,  give  to  this 
substance  its  gray  appearance. 

In  your  study  of  any  plate  of  the  brain,  you  will 
notice  that  this  gray  matter  is  folded  and  furrowed  ; 
just  as  the  glove  which  we  wear  follows  the  outline 
of  the  closed  hand,  running  up  here  and  down 
there  between  the  fingers,  so  this  gray  substance 
covers  and  follows  the  white  in  all  of  its  convolu- 
tions. It  is  easy  to  see  that  this  folding  of  the 
gray  substance  gives  it  a  greater  extent  of  surface 


THE  BRAIN.  169 

than  would  be  afforded  did  it  simply  conform  with 
the  interior  of  the  skull.  This  cake  of  gray  mat- 
ter, running  down  here  and  there,  folded  as  we 
have  said,  contains  about  three  hundred  square 
inches  of  surface.  Its  averas-e  thickness  is  one 
tenth  of  an  inch,  and  it  is  nearly  a  compact  mass 
of  cells.  It  has  been  estimated  that  in  the  gray 
substance  of  a  brain  of  average  size,  there  would 
be  two  hundred  millions  of  these  cells.  As  every 
cell  has  at  least  two  fibers  attached  to  it,  and  often 
many  more,  we  are  safe  in  estimating  the  number 
of  fibers  in  the  brain  at  forty-eight  hundred  million. 
Now  I  said  a  short  time  ago,  that  the  gray  matter, 
or  external  substance  of  the  brain,  was  composed 
almost  entirely  of  cells.  But  over  this  cake  of 
gray  matter,  following  it  in  all  its  foldings,  lies  a 
thin  network  called  the  pia  mater.  This  network 
is  made  up  almost  entirely  of  blood  vessels,  by 
means  of  which  blood  is  carried  to  the  fibers  and 
cells.  This  network  of  blood  vessels  covers  the 
brain  so  completely  that  every  part  of  it  is  abun- 
dantly supplied  with  blood. 

Well,  now,  you  have  before  you  the  material 
organ  concerned  in  mental  activity.  You  have 
here  the  white  substance,  composed  of  fibers,  the 


170  THE   BRAIN. 

cake  of  gray  matter  with  its  fibers  and  cells,  and 
finally  this  thin  membrane  that  carries  the  blood 
to  every  portion  of  the  brain.  Let  us  see  now,  if 
we  can,  how  mental  operations  are  carried  on  by 
the  mutual  working  of  these  three  things.  All 
those  who  have  studied  philosophy  are  aware  that 
galvanic  electricity  is  produced  from  three  sub- 
stances—  zinc,  copper,  and  acid.  When  a  piece 
of  zinc  is  united  with  a  piece  of  copper,  and  both 
immersed  in  acid,  you  have  galvanic  electricity  as 
the  result.  Now  if  you  do  not  carry  that  illustra- 
tion too  far,  you  will  find  in  it  an  analogy  that  will 
help  you  to  understand,  in  some  measure,  the 
probable  working  of  these  various  parts  of  the 
brain  in  the  processes  of  thought.  Let  the  zinc 
represent  the  white  fibers,  the  copper  the  cells, 
the  acid  the  blood,  and  you  will  have  what  might 
be  called  a  mental  battery,  which  under  the  control 
of  an  intelligence  back  of  it  is  capable  of  evolving 
thought,  as  the  galvanic  battery  is  capable  of 
evolving  electricity. 

But  you  ask.  Is  there  any  proof  for  all  this } 
Ls  there  any  proof  that  the  fibers  and  cells  of  the 
brain  have  anything  to  do  in  the  production  of 
thought,   or   that   even    a   remote    analogy  exists 


THF':   p.  RAIN.  171 

between  the  production  of  electricity  and  the  pro- 
duction of  thought  ?  I  answer  :  Yes  ;  with  this 
qualification.  Back  of  the  galvanic  battery  there 
stands  no  intelligence  ;  back  of  the  mental  battery 
there  does.  And  yet,  that  the  character  of  the 
thought  produced  depends  in  some  measure  on 
the  condition  of  the  organ,  is  beyond  question. 
I  suppose  that  you  are  well  aware  that  what  we 
call  clearness  and  dullness  of  thought,  depends 
largely  on  the  condition  of  the  blood.  Let  the 
arteries  send  vitiated  blood  to  the  brain,  and 
mental  activity  will  be  impaired.  Take  an  illustra- 
tion. You  are  shut  up  in  an  illy  ventilated  and 
crowded  room,  the  air  of  which  has  become  thor- 
oughly vitiated.  In  a  very  short  time  you  lose 
the  power  to  think  clearly,  a  dullness  comes  over 
you,  and  your  mind  refuses  to  act  as  it  does  at 
other  times.  Go  out  and  inhale  for  an  hour  or 
two  the  pure  air  ;  you  now  find  that  your  dullness 
has  left  you,  and  that  you  can  think  as  clearly  as 
usual. 

Now  why  did  you  lose  the  power  of  clear  and 
sustained  thought  in  the  first  case  }  The  answer 
is,  because  of  the  vitiated  state  of  the  blood,  re- 
sulting from  the  breathing  of  impure  air.     When 


172  THE   BRAIN. 

you  went  out,  and  the  blood  was  rendered  com- 
paratively pure  again,  you  could  think  again 
clearly.  The  blood  that  flows  to  the  fibers  and 
cells  must  be  pure,  or  thought  cannot  be  clear, 
incisive  and  sustained.  Come  back  to  our  e:al- 
vanic  battery,  and  you  will  see  the  analogy  between 
the  production  of  thought  and  the  production  of 
electricity.  Weaken  the  acid  in  the  battery,  so 
that  it  cannot  act  as  it  should  on  the  zinc  and 
copper  plates,  and  the  electricity  produced  is  but 
small  in  quantity.  Strengthen  the  acid  so  that  it 
can  act  properly  on  the  plates,  and  the  electric 
current  becomes  strong.  Vitiate  the  blood  that 
acts  on  the  cells  and  fibers,  and  that  makes  it  pos- 
sible for  them  to  perform  their  functions,  and  you 
weaken  the  powers  of  thought.  Reverse  the  pro- 
cess and  the  effect  is  also  reversed. 

We  have  now,  I  think,  learned  something  of  the 
probable  manner  in  which  thought  is  carried  on  in 
the  cerebrum  by  the  concurrent  action  of  the 
fibers,  the  cells,  and  the  blood,  and  are  able  at  the 
same  time  to  see  upon  what  grounds  the  brain  has 
been  called  the  organ  of  the  mind. 

We  now  come  to  a  very  important  fact,  and  I 
want  to  call  your  attention  particularly  to  it  be- 


THE  BRAIN.  173 

cause  of  the  intimate  bearing  that  it  has  upon  the 
subject  under  discussion.  I  speak  of  "The  locali- 
zation of  the  cerebral  functions."  By  this  it  is 
meant  that  in  any  certain  mental  operation,  not 
all  of  the  brain  is  brought  into  use,  but  only  a  cer- 
tain portion  of  it.  Only,  if  you  please,  that  specific 
group  of  fibers  and  cells  which  in  the  brain  is 
devoted  to  that  specific  purpose.  That  as  each 
key  in  the  instrument  is  used  in  the  production  of 
a  certain  tone,  and  is  used  alone  when  that  special 
tone  is  required,  so  with  the  various  groups  of 
fibers  and  cells  in  the  brain.  In  each  group  a 
certain  function  is  located.  That  group  of  fibers 
and  cells,  for  instance,  which  is  brought  into  oper- 
ation in  the  study  of  music,  is  a  different  group 
from  the  one  used  in  the  study  of  astronomy. 
The  one  brought  into  operation  in  acquiring  a 
knowledge  of  mathematics,  is  a  different  group 
from  the  one  used  in  the  study  of  language,  and 
so  on.  For  every  function  of  which  man  is  capa- 
ble, there  is  also  somewhere  in  the  brain  a  group 
of  fibers  and  cells  answering  to  it. 

Suppose  for  a  moment  that  one  should  set  him- 
self to  the  task  of  acquiring  a  knowledge  of  the 
Greek  language.     A    group   of    cells    and    fibers, 


174  THE  BRAIN. 

many  thousand  in  number,  are  brought  into  use. 
These  constitute  the  receptacle  of  that  special 
knowledge.  And  as  he  would  go  on  to  increase 
his  knowledge  of  the  Greek,  the  combination  would 
increase  in  its  number  by  the  addition  of  still  other 
fibers  and  cells  that  had  been  brought  into  use, 
something  after  this  manner  :  When  the  meaning 
of  a  Greek  verb  would  be  learned,  certain  cells 
with  their  fibers  would  be  charged  with  it.  When 
the  meaning  of  a  noun  would  be  learned,  other 
cells  with  their  fibers  would  become  the  receptacle, 
and  so  on.  But  if  such  an  one  were  to  study  music, 
an  entirely  different  set  of  fibers  and  cells  would 
be  brought  into  operation.  And  thus  when  any 
new  acquirement  is  attained,  some  special  group 
is  called  into  requisition,  and  henceforth  becomes 
the  receptacle  of  that  special  knowledge.  Just  as 
each  key  in  the  piano  is  employed  in  the  produc- 
tion of  a  certain  tone,  so  each  group  in  the  brain 
is  employed  in  its  own  specific  kind  of  knowledge. 
Perhaps  that  statement  should  be  qualified  some- 
what. If  each  branch  of  our  knowledge  were 
entirely  distinct  from  every  other  branch,  that 
statement  would  be  true.  But  such  is  not  the 
case  ;    and,  inasmuch  as  no  class  of  facts  can  be 


THE   BRAIN.  175 

said  to  stand  distinct  from  another  class,  we  may 
perhaps  say  that  in  cases  where  two  thoughts  are 
similar,  the  same  group  with  some  modification  of 
its  arrangement  or  combination  is  used  in  the 
contemplation  of  both.  As  the  musician  in  the 
production  of  a  certain  chord  will  sometimes  use 
keys  brought  into  use  in  the  production  of  other 
chords,  so  may  certain  cells  and  fibers  of  one  group 
be  used  in  connection  with  the  fibers  and  cells  of 
another  group,  and  yet  each  group  so  far  as  itself 
and  the  specific  work  which  it  does,  are  con- 
cerned, stands  distinct  from  every  other.  But  see 
now  the  proofs  upon  which  this  doctrine  of  the 
localization  of  functions  depends.  It  is  based  on 
three  facts  :  — 

The  first  is  the  fact  established  by  Broca.  He 
showed  that  lesion  in  the  posterior  part  of  the 
third  frontal  convolution  of  the  left  hemisphere 
resulted  in  aphasia. 

It  was  in  1861  that  Broca  established  that  fact 
and  proved  that  the  faculty  of  articulate  speech 
was  located  in  this  portion  of  the  brain,  and  that  a 
diseased  condition  of  this  part  resulted  in  aphasia, 
or  loss  of  speech. 

Secondly,  on   the    results    of   experiments    per- 


176  THE  BRAIN. 

formed  by  Dr.  Ferrier  on  the  cortical  substance  of 
the  cerebrum  and  other  ganglionic  centers  of  the 
brain.  It  was  found  by  Ferrier  that  when  an 
electrode  of  a  battery  was  applied  to  certain  parts 
of  the  brain,  movements  precisely  similar  to  those 
of  the  living  state  could  be  produced.  Expres- 
sions of  emotion,  of  pain,  the  perfectly  natural 
movement  of  any  part,  were  all  produced  when 
the  proper  point  in  the  hemisphere  was  touched  ; 
thus  showing  that  each  function  has  its  locality. 

Thirdly,  it  is  a  fact  attested  by  the  experience 
of  every  student,  that  when  the  mind  having  be- 
come wearied  by  intense  application  to  any  specific 
subject  turns  to  another,  a  sense  of  relaxation  is 
experienced.  This  could  not  be  the  case  were  the 
same  groups  used  in  the  contemplation  of  both, 
and  can  only  be  explained  on  the  supposition  that 
in  the  investigation  of  one  subject  a  certain  group 
is  brought  into  requisition,  and  that  when  the 
mind  turns  to  another,  the  exhausted  group  ceases 
to  be  used  and  a  fresh  group  is  employed. 

From  these  facts  we  are  warranted  in  saying 
that,  *'  There  is  no  departure  from  fact  or  strong 
probability  in  assigning  special  and  distinct  tracks 
for  the  currents  connected  with  each  separate 
sensation,  idea,  emotion,  or  other  conscious  state." 


THE   BRAIN.  177 

But  observe  now  that  when  such  a  nervous 
track  has  once  been  estabUshed,  by  the  bringing 
into  operation  of  a  certain  group  of  fibers  and 
cells,  then  ever  afterward  the  reproduction  of  the 
same  idea,  thought,  or  emotion,  results  when  the 
same  group  is  again  brought  into  action.  Thus 
we  have  what  we  call  memory.  In  every  act  of 
memory  the  same  group  of  fibers  and  cells,  which 
in  the  first  instance  was  employed  in  the  thought, 
or  conscious  state,  is  but  again  brought  into 
operation. 

Suppose  that,  to-day,  you  for  the  first  time  be- 
come acquainted  with  a  certain  fact  of  history. 
You  learn,  for  instance,  that  on  the  first,  second 
and  third  days  of  July,  1863,  the  Battle  of  Gettys- 
burg was  fought,  with  Gen.  Mead  in  command  of 
the  Federal,  and  Gen.  Lee  in  command  of  the 
Confederate  forces.  You  learn  further  that  the 
losses  on  either  side  were  a  certain  number  in 
killed,  wounded  and  missing.  Now  in  the  acquire- 
ment of  that  information  certain  fibers  and  cells 
were  brought  into  use,  and  a  certain  nervous  track 
established.  If  now,  after  long  years,  you  wish  to 
recall  these  facts,  how  do  you  do  it  ?  I  reply  : 
By  bringing  those  same  cells  and  fibers  into  action 


178  THE  BRAIN. 

which  were  employed  when  the  information  was 
being  acquired.  The  moment  they  again  act, 
there  is  brought  before  the  mind  the  facts  which 
you  wish  to  recall  and  of  which  they  were  made, 
as  it  were,  the  especial  receptacle.  Strike  a  key 
of  the  piano.  It  gives  out  a  certain  sound.  When 
the  piano  was  made  by  the  mechanic,  the  wire 
corresponding  to  that  key  was  constructed  so  as 
to  give  out  that  sound  and  no  other,  and  thus 
whenever  you  strike  it,  it  gives  out  precisely  the 
same  tone.  Stimulate  a  group  of  fibers  and  cells 
that  has  once  been  employed,  and  it  gives  out  the 
thought  or  experience  with  which  it  was  originally 
charged.  Stimulate  it  again,  and  it  gives  out  the 
same  thought  or  impression.  Stimulate  it  again, 
after  long  years  have  intervened,  and  it  gives  out 
the  same  thought  still.  That  is  memory.  For 
every  new  acquirement,  then,  I  bring  into  use  a 
new  combination  of  fibers  and  cells  ;  and  in  each 
act  of  memory  I  only  cause  them  to  act  again,  and 
thus  I  have  brought  before  me  once  more  the  fact, 
a  knowledge  of  which  was  once  gained  and  which 
I  now  wish  to  recall.  The  action  of  these  fibers 
and  cells  reproduces  it,  just  as  the  wire  in  the 
instrument  always  reproduces  the  same  tone.      I 


THE  BRAIN.  i79 

remarked  at  the  commencement  of  this  discussion, 
that  as  an  examination  into  the  structure  of  the 
piano,  an  inspection  of  its  wires  and  keys,  their 
action  and  relation,  would  help  us  to  understand 
how  music  is  produced  when  the  keys  are  touched 
by  the  musician,  so  also  would  an  examination  of 
the  brain  with  its  intricate  mechanism,  let  us  into 
the  secret  of  how  action  and  thought  might  result 
when  its  groups  of  fibers  and  cells  are  brought 
into  action.  For  the  brain  also  is  an  instrument 
upon  which  something  plays,  as  the  musician  does 
on  the  instrument.  I  think,  therefore,  that  we 
are  not  going  too  far  when  we  say  that  an  expla- 
nation, adequate  at  least  in  some  degree,  has  been 
made  of  the  instrument  concerned  in  the  produc- 
tion of  action  and  thought.  We  have  seen  how 
that  either  may  result  when  the  appropriate  fibers 
and  cells  are  brought  into  operation,  and  have 
learned  how  that  in  their  reaction,  memory  finds 
its  explanation.  Thus  we  have  examined  the 
instrument ;  we  have  seen  how  both  physical  and 
mental  action  are  brought  about  when  these  deli- 
cate groups  are  brought  into  play. 

But  mark  :  The  great  problem  still  remains  un- 
solved, for  it  is  one  thing  to  explain   the  instru- 


i8o  THE   BRAIN. 

ment,  it  is  quite  another  to  point  out  the  musician 
whose  existence  is  as  much  a  necessity  for  the 
production  of  melody  as  is  the  instrument.  We 
have  seen  what  the  result  would  be  if  certain  keys 
of  the  cerebral  key-board  were  touched  ;  but  we 
have  not  yet  accounted  for  the  melody,  inasmuch 
as  we  have  as  yet  failed  to  explain  the  manner  in 
which  these  cerebral  keys  are  touched  in  the  pro- 
duction of  action  and  thought  and  memory. 

It  is  clear  that  if  certain  nerves  are  stimulated, 
voluntary  and  involuntary  action  will  follow.  It 
is  clear  that  if  certain  groups  of  fibers  and  cells 
are  stimulated,  thought  follows.  It  is  equally 
clear  that  if  groups  having  once  been  brought 
into  action  in  the  attainment  of  any  acquirement 
are  again  made  to  act,  the  result  of  that  action  is 
memory.  But  how  now  are  these  fibers  and  cells 
stimulated,  and  what  is  it  that  stimulates  them } 
These,  let  me  ask  you  to  bear  in  mind,  are  the 
supreme  questions.  In  getting  an  answer  let  me 
ask  you  to  come  back  once  more  to  our  illustra- 
tion in  the  instrument.  There  are  two  ways  in 
which  sound  is  produced  from  the  instrument  : 

The  first  is  by  some  foreign  substance  acting  on 
and  depressing  the  keys.    A  weight  or  a  book  may 


THE  BRAIX.  i8i 

fall  upon  the  key  and  a  tone  be  produced  as  the 
result. 

The  second  way  in  which  sound  may  be  pro- 
duced from  the  piano  is  by  the  depression  of 
the  key  by  the  finger  of  the  musician.  Just  so 
with  this  complicated  instrument  out  of  which 
action  and  thought  come.  Its  keys  also  may  be 
caused  to  act  in  two  ways  :  first,  they  may  be 
stimulated  by  some  external  impression.  I  may 
feel  something,  I  may  hear  something,  I  may  see 
something,  and  by  this  the  fibers  and  cells  may  be 
stimulated  and  thus  caused  to  do  their  work,  yet 
all  that  is  but  the  foreign  substance  that  presses 
the  key  of  the  piano.  It  is  possible  for  me  to 
shut  my  eyes,  to  close  every  avenue  through  which 
any  sense  impression  can  come,  and  by  the  action, 
not  of  that  which  is  without,  but  of  something 
solely  from  within,  stimulate  these  nerves  and 
fibers  out  of  which  thought  and  action  come. 
Aye,  it  is  in  such  moments  as  these,  when  with 
the  external  world  shut  entirely  out  and  every 
avenue  along  which  external  impressions  can 
come  effectually  closed,  that  the  loftiest  and  the 
sublimest  thoughts  come  as  it  were  like  an  inspi- 
ration.    Granted  that  the  cerebral  keys  are  stimu- 


1 82  THE  BRAIN. 

lated  by  external  impressions,  then  I  ask,  What 
stimulated  them  when  no  external  impression  was 
present  ?  For,  mark  you,  these  keys  must  be 
stimulated,  and  without  a  stimulus  neither  physi- 
cal nor  mental  action  can  result. 

You  may  have  tone  by  permitting  the  foreign 
substance  to  fall  upon  the  key  of  the  piano,  but 
you  cannot  have  melody.  For  the  soul-stirring 
melodies  of  a  Mozart  or  Beethoven  the  keys  must 
be  swept  by  the  fingers  of  an  intelligent  musician. 
So,  likewise,  you  may  have  action,  physical  and 
mental,  as  the  result  of  external  impressions 
affecting  the  keys  of  fiber  and  cell.  For,  observe 
that  anything  that  causes  them  to  act,  also  causes 
them  to  perform  their  special  functions.  But 
consecutive,  intelligent,  profound  thought,  you 
can  have  alone  as  the  keys  in  the  brain  are 
touched  by  an  intelligent  musician.  You  per- 
ceive that  we  are  now  brought  face  to  face  with 
our  former  question,  namely.  Is  there  something 
that  plays  on  the  fibers  and  cells  of  the  brain  as 
the  musician  does  on  the  instrument }  You  will 
all  agree  with  me  when  I  affirm  that  it  is  possible 
for  us  to  direct  our  thoughts,  but  do  not  overlook 
the  fact  that  that  admission  is  of  immense  conse- 
quence here. 


THE   BRAhV.  183 

You  say  that  a  man  is  responsible  for  his 
thoughts,  and  all  the  world  agrees  with  you  in  the 
assertion.  We  can  think  of  what  we  choose.  By 
the  operation  of  our  wills  we  can  concentrate  our 
recollection  upon  a  certain  event  and  search 
out  its  details,  along  with  all  its  collateral  circum- 
stances, to  the  exclusion  of  everything  else.  But 
if  we  can  think  of  what  we  choose,  then  it  also 
follows  that  we  can  bring  into  operation  any  group 
of  fibers  and  cells  according  as  we  wish.  For  illus- 
tration :  if  I  wish  to  think  of  some  fact  connected 
with  the  Greek  language,  I  must  use  a  certain 
group  of  fibers  and  cells.  If  I  turn  my  attention 
to  music,  I  bring  that  particular  group  into  oper- 
ation which  is  the  storehouse  of  my  knowledge  of 
music  ;  and  so  on.  The  fact,  then,  that  we  can 
think  of  what  we  choose,  proves  that  we  have 
power  to  set  any  group  into  action  ;  for  without 
their  action  we  cannot  think.  And  now  I  ask 
again  the  question.  Is  there  something  within  that 
plays  on  the  fibers  and  cells  as  the  musician  does 
on  the  instrument  .-^  It  is  self-evident  that  the 
key  on  the  instrument  yonder  cannot  depress 
itself.  There  is  something  to  depress  it,  or  there 
can  be  no  sound.     But  if  the  key  of  the  instru- 


iS4  THE  BR  Am. 

ment  cannot  depress  itself,  but  needs  the  finger  of 
the  musician  to  produce  from  it  its  tone,  so  neither 
can  the  keys  of  fiber  and  cell  depress  themselves. 
They  also  need  the  finger  of  the  intelligent  musi- 
cian. What  you  may  call  this  invisible  musician 
is  a  matter  of  small  consequence.  You  may  call  it 
the  soul,  you  may  call  it  the  ego  ;  but  that  such  an 
agent  is  present  is  beyond  question.  For  if  melody 
proves  the  presence  of  a  musician  to  touch  the 
keys  that  are  in  harmony,  then  thought  proves  the 
presence  of  a  musician  to  touch  the  cerebral  keys 
that  also  are  in  harmony.  And  if  melody  proves 
that  the  keys  of  the  piano  are  touched,  so  does 
thought  prove  that  there  is  something  that  plays 
on  the  brain  as  the  musician  does  on  the  instru- 
ment. There  is  then  something  that  depresses 
the  fiber  and  cell  keys  of  the  brain. 

But  what  now  is  this  something  }  My  friends, 
to  speak  of  this  agent  that  stimulates  the  cerebral 
groups  as  a  material  something,  a  force  analogous 
to  electricity,  is  nothing  short  of  downright  fool- 
ishness. To  assume  that  position  is  to  betray 
a  lamentable  ignorance  of  two  facts,  either  of 
which   is  fatal  to  such  a  hypothesis. 

First,  The  nerves  are  without  insulation.     For 


THE  BRAIN.  185 

this  reason  they  afford  no  conduction  for  the  elec- 
tric currents,  and  experiment  has  proved  that 
electricity  applied  to  them,  instead  of  following 
along  their  course,  distributes  itself  throughout 
the  body. 

Secondly,  This  stimulus  acts  as  no  mode,  or 
form,  or  mood  of  physical  force  acts.  From  these 
facts  it  follows  that  that  something  by  which  the 
stimulus  is  given,  cannot  be  a  material  something. 

But  we  may  go  one  step  further,  and  affirm  that 
that  something  is  intelligent.  As  the  musician 
selects  those  keys  which  are  in  harmony,  so  does 
this  something  use  one  group  in  preference  to 
another  in  volitional  thought.  This  something 
therefore  exercises  choice.  I  ask  now  the  meta- 
physician. What  is  the  highest  attribute  of  an 
intelligent  being }  He  answers.  Choice ;  the 
power  to  choose  one  thing  in  preference  to  an- 
other, the  ability  to  weigh  and  decide  in  favor  of 
one  thing  over  against  another.  But  if  choice  is 
an  attribute  of  intelligence,  then  is  this  invisible 
something,  this  unseen  musician,  intelligent.  We 
have  then  two  facts  which  are  scientifically  certain  : 

First,  There  is  something  that  plays  on  the 
fibers  and  cells  of  the  brain,  as  the  musician  does 
on  the  instrument. 


1 86  THE  BRAIN. 

Secondly,  That  something  which  corresponds  to 
the  musician  is  intelligent. 

But  if  there  is  an  invisible,  intelligent  something 
that  plays  on  the  fibers  and  cells  of  the  brain,  as 
the  musician  does  on  the  instrument,  then  that 
something  must  be  independent  of  these  fibers 
and  cells,  as  the  musician  is  independent  of  the 
instrument. 

Standing,  then,  upon  those  two  propositions, 
first,  that  there  is  something  that  plays  on  the 
fibers  and  cells  of  the  brain  as  the  musician  does 
on  the  instrument,  second,  that  that  something 
is  intelligent,  I  can  look  through  the  clouds 
which  are  soon  to  encircle  me  and  catch  a  glimpse 
of  the  beyond. 

What  though  I  shall  drop  my  body  as  I  enter  the 
shadow }  I  shall  drop  it  as  the  butterfly  drops 
the  chrysalis.  If  the  soul  plays  on  the  fibers  and 
cells  of  the  brain  as  the  musician  does  on  the 
instrument,  then  it  must  be  independent  of  them 
as  the  musician  is  independent  of  the  instrument. 
And  if  the  destruction  of  the  instrument  cannot 
be  the  destruction  of  the  musician,  because  he  is 
independent  of  the  instrument,  then  the  destruc- 


THE  BRAIN.  187 

tion  of  the  body  is  not  the  destruction  of  the  soul, 
because  it  is  independent  of  the  body. 

"The  world  recedes  I  it  disappears! 

Heaven  opens  to  my  eyes  !  —  my  ears 

With  sounds  seraphic  ring  : 

Lend,  lend  your  wings  !  I  mount !  I  fly  I 

O,  grave  !  where  is  thy  victory  ? 

O,  death  I  where  is  thy  sting  ?  " 


THE    SPIRITUAL   BODY. 

What  if  the  earth 
Be  but  the  shadow  of  heaven  and  things  therein 
Each  to  the  other  like,  more  than  on  earth  is  thought? 

—  Milton. 
There  is  a  spiritual  body. —  Paul. 


THE   SPIRITUAL    BODY. 

Science  and  revelation  alike  testify  that  the 
present  visible  universe  with  all  that  belongs  to  it 
shall  at  length  be  dissolved.  There  will  come 
a  time  when  the  sun  shall  have  burned  itself  out  ; 
when  the  moon,  having  grown  old,  shall  fail  to 
make  her  nightly  journey  through  the  sky  ;  when 
the  stars,  one  after  another,  shall  grow  dim  and 
then  go  out  forever  ;  and  when  the  earth  with  its 
mountains  and  its  seas  and  all  that  belongs  to  it 
shall  cease  to  be.     The  time  will  come  when  — 

"  The  cloud-capped  towers,  the  gorgeous  palaces, 
The  solemn  temples,  the  great  globe  itself, 
Yea,  all  that  it  inherit,  shall  dissolve  ; 
And,  like  this  unsubstantial  pageant,  faded. 
Leave  not  a  rack  behind." 

It  is  in  such  a  world    that  man   finds  himself, 

with  nothing  around  him  that  is  permanent,  with 

everything  hastening  to  its  dissolution.     And  yet 

face  to  face  with  a  dissolving  universe,  man  has 

191 


192  THE  SPIRITUAL   BODY. 

always  stood  firm  in  the  conviction  that  he  is  an 
exception  to  the  universal  order.  Amid  the  perish- 
ing, he  has  ever  clung  to  the  thought  that  he  at 
least  is  immortal. 

Near  four  thousand  years  ago,  sitting  in  his  tent 
door,  conversing  with  his  three  friends.  Job  spoke 
his  belief  in  his  immortality:  "Though  after  my 
skin  worms  destroy  this  body,  yet  in  my  flesh  I 
shall  see  God.  Whom  I  shall  see  for  myself,  and 
my  eyes  shall  behold  and  not  another." 

Those  who  have  moulded  the  thinking  of  every 
nation,  both  ancient  and  modern,  have  taught 
that  man  is  immortal.  Homer  sang  it  into  the 
hearts  of  the  Greeks,  and  Socrates  put  it  into 
their  philosophy.  Confucius  taught  it  to  the 
Chinese,  and  Zoroaster  to  the  Persians.  In  the 
religious  books  of  India  we  find  this  prayer  ad- 
dressed to  the  great  Soma  : 

''  Where  there  is  eternal  light,  in  the  world 
where  the  sun  is  placed,  in  that  imperishable, 
immortal  world,  place  me,  O,  Soma  ! 

"Where  life  is  free,  in  the  third  heaven  of 
heavens,  where  the  worlds  are  radiant,  there  make 
me  immortal.  Where  wishes  and  desires  are, 
where  the  bowl  of  the  bright  Soma  is,  where  there 


THE  SriRITUAL   BODY.  193 

is  food  and  rejoicing,  there  make  me  immortal. 
Where  there  is  happiness  and  deUght,  where  joy 
and  pleasure  reside,  where  the  desires  of  our 
desire  are  attained,  there  make  me  immortal." 

The  Indian  in  the  early  wilds  of  America  had 
also  his  rude  ideas  of  a  world  beyond.  Far  off  to 
the  west,  where  he  saw  the  sun  set,  beyond  a 
dreadful  deep  and  rapid  stream  over  which  from 
hill  to  hill  there  lay  a  narrow,  slippery  passage, 
there  were  the  delightful  hunting  grounds.  In 
the  frozen  zone  the  Greenlander  talks  of  a  land 
where  perpetual  summer  reigns,  where  all  is  sun- 
shine, and  there  is  no  night  ;  where  good  water 
and  birds  and  fish  and  reindeer  are,  without  end. 
The  way  to  this  delightful  place  is  down  a  fright- 
ful precipice,  all  stained  with  the  blood  of  those 
who  have  gone  down  before  ;  and  if,  perchance, 
this  precipice  is  descended  in  winter  or  in  tempest, 
and  the  soul  do  but  slip,  it  perishes  utterly. 

And  thus  in  all  ages  and  among  all  nations  man 
has  believed  in  his  own  immortality  ;  and  though 
he  has  seen  the  perishable  nature  of  everything 
around  him,  he  has  ever  experienced  an  inner 
certainty  that  to  the  universal  order  he  at  least  is 
an  exception. 


194  THE  SPIRITUAL    BODY. 

Nor  has  man  come  into  the  possession  of  this 
belief  through  tradition.  Wherever  and  whenever 
he  has  sat  in  confidential  communion  with  his  own 
soul  he  has  heard  it  speak  to  him  of  his  immor- 
tality. But  simple  and  cheering  as  this  conviction 
is  when  possessed  in  its  native  purity,  as  a  result 
of  certain  phases  of  modern  speculation  and  so- 
called  scientific  thinking,  it  has  come  to  lose  much 
of  its  significance. 

To  the  mind  unbiased  by  false  systems  of 
thinking,  a  future  life  has  always  meant  a  con- 
tinued existence  of  the  self-conscious  individual. 
It  has  demanded  that  as  in  this  life  man  is  in  the 
possession  of  a  self-conscious  and  an  individual 
existence,  so  must  he  be  in  the  future.  Disrobed 
of  all  that  hinders  and  limits  him  here,  like  the 
butterfly  that  shakes  off  its  chrysalis  and  then 
rises  into  a  higher  and  freer  state,  so  man,  freed 
from  the  limitations  arising  out  of  his  association 
with  his  present  tenement,  shall  come  into  a  freer 
and  higher  existence,  yet  retaining  his  personal 
identity.  It  is  needless  to  say  that  a  conception 
such  as  this  is  alone  able  to  satisfy  our  ideas  of 
a  real  immortality,  and,  answering  as  it  does  every 
hope  and  longing,  it  alone  is  comprehensive. 


THE  SPIRITCAL    BODY.  195 

And  yet,  in  the  discussion  of  the  subject  before 
us,  it  will  be  necessary  to  take  a  hasty  glance  at 
two  other  conceptions  that  now  set  themselves  as 
rivals  to  this  in  modern  thinking. 

The  first  is  the  one  offered  from  the  side  of  the 
materialist.  Man's  immortality,  according  to  this 
conception,  finds  its  basis  in  the  conservation  of 
matter.  Lons;  asfo  it  was  discovered  that  matter 
is  imperishable,  and  the  law  of  the  conservation  of 
matter  established  as  a  fact  of  science.  When 
a  mass  of  matter  was  changed  from  one  state  into 
another,  as  is  done  when  a  piece  of  mineral  is 
changed  from  the  solid  into  the  gaseous  form,  it 
was  found  by  the  use  of  the  balance,  that  no 
particle  of  it  was  lost.  The  weight  of  the  gas 
was  precisely  equal  to  the  weight  of  the  mineral 
out  of  which  it  had  been  evolved  ;  and  although  its 
form  was  changed,  yet  no  particle  was  destroyed. 
Numerous  experiments  with  matter  in  its  various 
states  have  confirmed  the  fact  that  by  no  process 
at  the  command  of  man  can  matter  be  altered  in 
quantity,  or  annihilated.  By  heat  and  pressure  it 
may  be  changed  from  one  state  into  another  ; 
a  solid  may  be  changed  into  a  liquid,  a  liquid 
into  a  gas  ;    the  process  may  be  reversed,  and  yet 


196  THE  SPIRITUAL   BODY. 

the  amount  of  matter  abides  the  same  precisely  in 
quantity. 

You  have  heard  of  the  experiment  performed  by 
Faraday.  One  day  a  workman  in  his  laboratory 
accidentally  dropped  a  little  silver  cup  into  a  jar 
containing  acid.  In  a  short  time  it  disappeared. 
Among  the  inexperienced  chemists  then  working 
under  the  direction  of  the  great  scientist,  the 
question  was  discussed  whether  the  cup  could  ever 
be  restored.  One  said  it  could  not ;  that  being 
now  dissolved  and  rendered  imperceptible  it  was 
destroyed.  In  the  midst  of  the  discussion,  Fara- 
day entered  the  room,  and  learning  what  had  hap- 
pened, he  put  certain  chemicals  into  the  jar,  and  in 
a  few  moments  every  particle  of  the  silver  was 
precipitated.  He  lifted  it  out  a  shapeless  mass, 
sent  the  precipitate  to  a  silversmith,  and  the  cup 
was  restored.  And  thus  by  various  processes 
known  to  the  chemist,  the  form  or  state  of  matter 
may  be  changed.  A  silver  cup  may  be  dissolved, 
held  in  solution,  become  invisible,  but  in  no  case 
can  matter  be  destroyed.  Well,  now,  when  this 
law  of  the  imperishability  of  matter  was  discov- 
ered, materialists  at  once  took  it  up  and  said, 
"This  will  explain  man's   notion  of  immortality; 


THE  SPIRITUAL   BODY.  I97 

matter  is  immortal."  "  In  the  material  of  his 
present  body  man  finds  the  promise  of  his  immor- 
tality. True,  these  material  particles  now  ex- 
isting in  his  body  shall  come  into  other  relations. 
In  the  dissolution  of  the  grave,  these  particles 
that  now  enter  into  the  constitution  of  your  and 
my  bodies  shall  cease  to  exist  in  their  present 
relation,  and  each  molecule  shall  go  out  into  the 
universe  to  enter  into  new  relations  ;  but  then, 
the  particles,  the  atoms,  cannot  be  destroyed. 
Man  is  matter ;  matter  cannot  cease  to  exist  ; 
hence  man  as  matter  is  immortal," 

The  defect  in  this  view,  you  at  once  see,  is  that 
it  denies  to  man  a  personal,  individual  immortality. 
Not  as  the  ego  that  now  is,  shall  man  live  on. 
Not  as  a  person,  retaining  identity  ;  but  in  a  mil- 
lion different  forms  —  in  plant  and  earth  and  air, 
neither  of  which  can  be  self-conscious  —  the  man 
who  now  is,  is  to  live.  To  say  that  this  doctrine 
denies  man's  immortality,  is  to  utter  a  truth  that 
is  self-evident ;  for  if  we  do  not  live  on  as  indi- 
viduals, we  cannot  be  said  to  live  on  at  all. 

The  second  view  is  that  which  finds  the  promise 
of  man's  immortality  in  the  persistence  of  the 
species.      ''  The  species,"  say  the  advocates  of  this 


198  THE  SPIRITUAL   BODY. 

view,  ''must  be  forever  perpetuated."  ''The  indi- 
vidual may  die,  but  humanity  will  still  live  on  in 
the  generations  that  shall  come  and  go  forever." 
Now  it  is  a  wonderful  truth,  and  fatal,  if  you 
please,  to  the  theory  of  evolution,  that  species  are 
persistent.  The  mollusk  that  suns  itself  on  the 
ocean  beach  to-day,  is  identical  with  its  sister  of 
the  same  species,  that  lived  on  the  shores  of  the 
once  almost  shoreless  ocean.  Practically,  in  species 
there  is  no  variation. 

When  the  ancient  Egyptians  embalmed  their 
dead,  they  put  with  them  seeds,  which  now  for 
five  thousand  four  hundred  years  have  retained 
their  vitality.  And  these,  when  taken  out  of  their 
sepulchers  and  planted  to-day,  spring  up  into 
plants,  the  flowers  of  which  in  color  and  every 
feature,  are  identical  with  those  that  now  make  up 
the  flora  of  the  Nile  valley.  The  plant  imbedded 
in  the  sedimentary  deposits  more  than  fifty  thou- 
sand years  ago,  presents  no  differences  from  the 
same  species  that  now  bloom  in  our  valleys  and 
gardens,  and  man  is  the  same  in  posture  and  in 
visage,  in  mind  and  in  power,  that  he  was  when 
first  he  walked  the  earth.  It  is  true  that  the 
species  are  persistent,  immortal.      But  fatal  as  that 


THE   SPIRITUAL    BODY.  199 

fact  must  be  to  a  theory  I  need  not  name,  yet  in  it 
man  is  asked  to  look  for  his  immortaUty.  And 
when  this  fact  of  the  persistence  of  the  species 
was  demonstrated,  it  was  said  in  some  quarters, 
"  Here  is  the  solution  of  the  problem  of  the  future 
life."  "  Man  as  man  shall  live  on  forever.  The 
individual  shall  die,  but  the  species  will  remain. 
In  the  perseverance  of  the  species,  therefore,  man 
is  to  look  for  his  immortality." 

It  is  said  that  on  the  shores  of  the  Dead  Sea, 
on  verdant  trees,  there  once  grew  most  beautiful 
apples.  In  crusted  by  the  salt  of  that  salty  air, 
they  were  gradually  transformed,  and  though  re- 
taining their  natural  color  and  appearance,  they  at 
length  became  a  mass  of  stringent  salt.  Attracted 
by  their  beauty,  the  traveler  would  hasten  to  the 
spot,  press  the  seeming  fruit  to  his  lips  ;  but  in- 
stead of  the  satisfaction  promised,  it  crumbled  into 
ashes  and  bitterness.  And  so  with  the  view  of 
immortality  just  presented.  Attractive  as  it  may 
seem  when  first  contemplated,  to  the  soul  longing 
for  a  life  beyond,  it  affords  but  the  most  bitter 
delusion.  What  though  the  species  do  live  on  } 
If  the  individual  is  lost,  there  can  be  no  real  im- 
mortality.    In  either  of  these  views  the  inspiration 


200  THE  SPIRITUAL   BODY. 

that  comes  out  of  man's  belief  in  a  future  life  is 
wanting.  Life  is  robbed  of  its  sublime  signifi- 
cance, indeed  becomes  empty  and  meaningless. 
Nothing  short  of  the  perpetuity  of  the  individual, 
and  jDossessed  of  his  self-consciousness,  can  be 
made  to  answer  not  only  our  higher  hopes,  but 
also  our  rational  conceptions  of  what  a  continued 
existence  for  man  must  be.  Real  immortality 
must  be  the  immortality  of  a  personal  life. 

Well,  now,  we  have  gone  far  enough  to  see  the 
one  single  requirement  to  which  every  true  con- 
ception of  man's  immortality  must  of  necessity 
answer.  Every  true  conception  of  immortality 
must  embrace  in  it  personal  identity.  The  indi- 
vidual of  the  future  must  be  one  with  the  individual 
that  is  now.  He  must  be  recognized  as  the  same 
person,  and  as  the  same  person  he  must  be 
able  to  recognize  himself.  As  we  unhesitatingly 
affirm  ourselves  as  one  with  the  individual  which 
in  any  moment  of  the  past  we  recognized  our- 
selves to  be,  so,  in  a  future  state,  must  each  one 
be  able  to  identity  himself  as  the  same  individual 
that  existed  here. 

It  follows,  then,  that  this  identity  is  to  be  tested 
and  proven  first  of  all  by  memory. 


THE   SPIRITUAL   BODY.  201 

See  how  this  comes.  We  are  now  certain  that 
we  are  one  with  the  individual  who  by  our  name 
and  in  the  possession  of  our  individual  conscious- 
ness lived  years  ago.  And  yet  in  the  case  of  the 
aged  man,  a  thousand  changes  have  come ;  a  thou- 
sand scenes  have  passed  ;  the  years  have  come 
and  gone  ;  youth  has  come  and  gone  ;  Life's  winter 
has  been  reached,  and  the  frail  form  now  leans  on 
the  staff  of  old  age.  And  yet  that  man  recognizes 
himself  as  the  same  one  who  once  as  a  boy, 
played  with  his  companions  on  the  hillside,  in  the 
meadow,  and  beside  the  brook,  now  seventy  years 
aero.  But  how  comes  he  to  recoo-nize  that  fact, 
and  how  does  he  prove  it  ?  Is  it  because  he  finds 
himself  in  the  same  environment  ?  It  cannot  be 
that.  The  objects  which  as  a  boy  he  knew,  are 
perhaps  no  more.  Every  landmark  has  changed. 
Perhaps  he  is  even  far  removed  from  the  place  in 
which  his  childhood  was  spent.  Does  he  recognize 
himself  as  the  same  individual  by  his  body  .''  In  the 
worn-out  frame  that  now  is,  no  man  could  recognize 
the  child  that  once  played  so  buoyantly.  And 
yet  there  is  something  in  that  man  which  connects 
the  present  with  the  past,  and  enables  him  to 
affirm    himself   to  be    the  same.     It    is    memory. 


202  THE   SPIRITUAL   BODY. 

Take  that  away,  and  no  man  could  be  certain  that 
he  is  the  same  individual  he  once  was.  Through 
all  the  physical  and  psychical  changes  that  have 
come  and  gone,  through  all  circumstances,  memory 
has  continued,  connecting  his  present  consciousness 
with  his  past  ;  and  thus,  though  now  an  aged  man, 
he  recognizes  himself  as  the  same  individual.  It 
is  memory  that  assures  him  of  his  personal  identity. 
It  must  therefore  be  that  if  in  the  future  life  we 
are  to  recognize  ourselves  as  the  individuals  now 
in  the  present,  such  recognition  is  to  be  had  by 
virtue  of  memory;  it  is  memory  alone  that  can 
bridge  between  the  present  life  and  the  future. 

But  in  order  that  the  identity  of  the  individual 
be  conserved^  character  and  disposition  must  also 
be  perpetuated.  If,  for  instance,  a  radical  trans- 
formation of  character  and  disposition  were  in  any 
wise  to  be  effected,  then  could  not  the  individual 
in  the  future  life  either  recognize  himself  or  be 
recognized  as  the  individual  that  existed  here } 
Very  long  ago  Socrates  saw  and  gave  utterance  to 
this  truth.  "■  There  is  a  tale,  Callicles,"  says 
Socrates,  "  which  I  have  heard  and  believe,  from 
which  I  draw  the  following  inferences  :  Death,  if 
I  am  right,  is  in  the  first  place  the  separation  from 


THE  SPIRITUAL   BODY.  203 

one  another  of  two  thing's,  soul  and  body  ;  this  and 
nothing  else.  And  after  they  are  separated  they 
retain  their  several  characteristics,  which  are  much 
the  same  as  in  this  life.  The  body  has  the  same 
nature  and  ways  and  affections,  all  clearly  dis- 
cernible. .  .  .  And  in  a  word,  whatever  was 
the  habit  of  the  body  during  life,  would  be  dis- 
tinguished after  death,  either  perfectly  or  in  a 
great  measure,  and  for  a  time.  And  I  should  infer 
that  this  is  equally  true  of  the  soul,  Callicles." 

And  now  with  these  facts  before  us,  each  of 
which  I  deem  to  be  self-evident,  we  are  brought 
to  see  the  necessity  of  a  something  by  virtue  of 
which  all  this  may  become  possible.  We  are 
brought  to  see  that  no  discussion  of  the  question 
of  man's  immortality  can  be  thorough  or  compre- 
hensive in  which  the  matter  under  discussion  is 
ignored.  In  short,  we  are  led  to  the  conclusion 
that  a  spiritual  body  is  a  postulate  of  man's  im- 
mortality. It  may  perhaps  be,  that  with  some, 
and  from  the  theological  side,  the  question  of 
man's  immortality  may  be  discussed  separately 
and  without  reference  to  that  which  such  immor- 
tality of  necessity  implies.  But  it  is  not  so  when 
we  come  to  its  discussion  from  the  scientific  side. 


?o4  THE   SPIRITUAL    BODY. 

Considered  from  this,  immortality  demands  the 
existence  of  an  organ,  in  other  words,  a  spiritual 
body.     The  one  is  a  postulate  of  the  other. 

Indeed,  it  would  seem  that  even  Paul  was 
unable  to  discuss  the  one  without  reference  to  the 
other.  In  the  fifteenth  chapter  of  First  Corinthians, 
in  his  treatment  of  the  resurrection  and  our  future 
existence,  in  order  to  dispel  certain  objections,  he 
finds  it  necessary  to  throw  into  the  midst  of  his 
discussion,  in  order  to  explain  the  possibility  of  a 
future  life,  the  expression,  "  There  is  a  spiritual 
body."  In  his  judgment,  without  the  statement  of 
that  fact,  the  doctrine  of  the  resurrection  and  a 
future  life  could  not  be  understood.  It  comes, 
therefore,  that  alone  as  the  presence  of  a  spiritual 
body  now  resident  in  man  is  admitted,  can  this 
immortality  be  proven. 

Let  us  now  see  how  this  appears.  We  have  just 
been  saying  that  immortality  implied  personal 
identity  ;  that  the  person  in  the  future  life  must 
recognize  himself  as  one  with  the  person  that  is 
now.  We  have  also  just  seen  that  this  identity 
or  oneness  of  the  individual  in  both  states  is  to 
be  tested,  first  of  all  by  memory.  But  that  being 
the  case,  a  spiritual  body  follows  as  a   necessity. 


THE   SPIRITUAL   BODY.  2 05 

For  how  are  \vc  to  explain  the  continuance  of 
memory  when  we  have  ignored  or  denied  the  ex- 
istence of  a  spiritual  body  ?  Memory  implies  an 
organ,  an  organ  on  which  impressions  whether 
physical  or  mental  have  been  recorded.  For.  ob- 
serve that  physiological  science  has  established 
the  truth  that  our  recollection  of  past  events  is 
dependent  on  certain  traces  left  behind  on  some 
enduring  substance  hid  away  in  the  cerebral 
regions ;  that  each  thought  we  think  is  accom- 
panied by  certain  molecular  displacements  or  mo- 
tions in  the  organ  of  the  mind,  and  that  these 
are  in  some  way  stored  up  in  that  organ  so  as  to 
produce  what  we  call  physical  memory.  That 
without  such  an  organ  connecting  the  individual 
with  the  past,  no  one  could  possibly  have  memory 
on  the  one  hand,  or  a  conscious  individual  exist- 
ence on  the  other.  The  necessity,  therefore,  of 
a  spiritual  body  or  organ,  some  durable  sub- 
stance connecting  the  individual  of  the  future  state 
with  the  individual  of  this,  becomes  apparent. 
And  thus  you  see  that  in  every  comprehensive 
discussion  of  man's  immortality,  the  question  of 
the  spiritual  body  cannot  be  ignored.  In  view 
of  this  fact,  two  questions,  far-reaching  in  their 
importance,  are  before   us. 


2o6  THE  SPIRITUAL   BODY. 

First,  Is  man  in  possession  of  such  a  spiritual 
body  ? 

Second,  What  is  its  nature  and  character  ? 

Take  the  first.  Is  man  now  in  possession  of 
a  spiritual  body  ? 

You  know  it  is  sometimes  said  ''that  the  writ- 
ers of  that  Book  whose  doctrines  and  whose  pre- 
cepts many  of  us  have  learned  to  love,  were  not 
philosophers,  were  not  men  of  science,"  We  never 
get  through  hearing  of  ''the  ignorant  fishermen" 
whom  Jesus  picked  up  on  the  Sea  of  Galilee  and 
made  of  them  disciples.  Often  has  it  been  more 
than  insinuated  that  superstitions  and  groundless 
fancies  common  enough  among  fishermen,  have 
crept  into  the  sacred  Word,  and  because  found 
there,  are  believed  by  the  ignorant  who  call  them- 
selves disciples  of  the  Nazarene. 

Against  the  statement  made  by  Paul,  "  There  is 
a  spiritual  body,"  the  same  objection  has  been 
urged.  Was  it  not  a  mere  notion  of  his  own  } 
Was  it  not  a  superstition  current  among  his  own 
class,  and  which  never  had  and  never  can  have 
foundation  in  fact  }  So  some  have  talked  of  the 
spiritual  body. 

But,  my  friends,  it    is  a  truth  which    in  these 


THE   SPIRITUAL   BODY.  207 

times  ought  not  to  be  lost  sight  of,  that  one  by 
one  these  so-called  superstitions  of  the  Galilean 
fishermen,  as  men  have  come  to  understand  the 
universe  better,  have  also  come  to  be  recognized 
as  facts  in  science.  And  if  they  were  ignorant, 
then  it  must  now  be  admitted  that  they  always 
spoke  better  than  they  knew.  It  is  true  that  these 
men  did  not  pretend  to  be  men  of  science ;  but  it 
nevertheless  remains  that  they  somehow  understood 
matter  and  mind  and  force  as  no  man  has  under- 
stood them  since.  It  has  been  a  long  and  weary 
march,  but  out  of  the  darkness  and  into  the  light 
we  are  gradually  moving  on  and  up  to  where  the 
disciples  stood,  and  our  conceptions  of  the  uni- 
verse are  gradually  becoming  identical  with  those 
that  the  disciples  held.  Scientific  men  are  coming- 
nearer  to  the  unseen  to-day  than  uninspired  men 
ever  came  before  ;  and  the  reality  of  that  unseen, 
and  its  connection  with  the  seen,  are  no  longer 
disputed.  It  is  Shakespeare  who  makes  Hamlet 
say  :  — 

"  There  are  more  things  in  heaven  and  earth,  Horatio, 
Than  are  dreampt  of  in  your  philosophy." 

To    the   truthfulness  of    that  statement,   Science, 


2o8  THE  SPIRITUAL  BODY. 

with  a  profounder  veneration  then  ever  before, 
nods  its  assent.  And  yet  I  shall  not  ask  you  to 
take  the  statement  of  Paul,  in  relation  to  the 
spiritual  body,  as  final.  Apart  from  Scripture, 
there  are  two  very  conclusive  proofs  of  its  exist- 
ence. The  first  of  these  may  be  termed  the 
psychical. 

It  is  a  fact  revealed  in  every  man's  conscious- 
ness that,  through  all  physical  changes  he  retains 
his  personal  identity.  Now,  Science  tells  us  that 
within  a  certain  fixed  period,  not  more  at  most 
than  seven  years,  every  particle  of  the  body  has 
been  eliminated  and  other  particles  substituted. 
In  other  words,  within  this  period  these  physical 
bodies  of  ours  undergo  a  complete  and  radical 
change.  Every  particle  of  every  tissue  in  this 
period  is  transformed  ;  not  a  cell  or  corpuscle,  not 
an  atom  of  bone  or  nerve  or  muscle  or  brain  fiber 
or  connective  tissue,  is  the  same  at  the  close  of 
seven  years  as  entered  into  the  framework  of  the 
body  at  the  commencement  of  that  period.  No 
particle  of  the  body  of  the  child  at  seven  years  is 
the  same  as  that  with  which  it  began  life.  It  fol- 
lows, then,  that  in  the  case  of  the  youth  of  fourteen 
years,   every  particle   of  his  physical   system   has 


THE  sriRrruAL  body.  209 

twice  changed  and  given  place  to  others.  At 
twenty-one  this  change  has  been  thrice  effected  ; 
and  in  the  case  of  the  one  who  has  reached  the 
age  of  seventy,  this  change  has  been  effected  no 
less  than  ten  times.  At  seventy  years  a  man  has, 
therefore,  been  in  possession  of  ten  different 
bodies,  each  entirely  separate  and  distinct  from 
any  of  the  preceding.  The  change  that  goes  on, 
finds  its  illustration  in  the  various  characters 
assumed  by  the  player  in  the  theater.  In  a  par- 
ticular scene,  in  the  impersonation  of  a  certain 
character,  a  certain  garb  will  be  assumed,  while 
in  another  scene  under  a  different  garb,  an  en- 
tirely different  character  is  represented  ;  and  so 
on  during  the  course  of  the  play.  Changing  his 
costume  to  suit  the  characters  he  aims  to  repre- 
sent, a  single  player  will,  to  the  eye  of  the  un- 
initiated, appear  to  be  as  many  persons  as  the 
characters  he  has  assumed.  But  to  the  initiated 
the  identity  of  the  person  in  each  of  the  characters 
is  apparent.  The  external  may  have  changed,  the 
tone  of  voice  may  have  varied,  the  attitude  and 
gesture  may  have  been  different,  and  yet  back  of 
each  character  stands  the  one  and  the  same  indi- 
vidual actor.      It  is  so  with  man  durin^^  the  course 


2IO  THE  SPIRITUAL   BODY. 

\  of  a  long  life.  The  physical  may  change  ;  no  atom 
of  the  body  may  remain  the  same  ;  and  yet  through 
/  it  all,  he  recognizes  the  certain  truth  that  he  is 
still  the  same  person.  But  now  the  fact  that  each 
individual  knows  himself  to  be  one  through  all 
these  changes,  and  recognizes  that  his  identity 
through  life  is  a  certainty  in  spite  of  the  flux  of 
the  particles  of  the  body,  points  us  to  something 

/  in  him  that  has  remained  the  same  through  all  the 
changes.  Beneath  the  matter  that  has  come  and 
gone,  a  something  has  persisted,  and,  by  virtue  of 
this,  man  recognizes  his  identity  and  is  able  to 
affirm  in  spite  of  the  fact  that  every  particle  of 
his  visible  and  tangible  body  has  changed,  that 
something  has  remained,  and  that  that  something 
is  himself. 

It  is  certain,  therefore,  that  this  something 
which  has  endured  is  not  the  gross  matter  of 
his  body.  It  is  not  this  that  has  remained  un- 
changed, but  something  back  of  this  ;  a  something 
not  subject  to  the  laws  that  govern  ordinary 
matter,  neither  indeed  can  be.  And  thus  out  of 
man's  consciousness  of  personal  identity  comes 
an  argument  for  the  existence  of  his  spiritual 
body  :    a   something    within    man    that    continues 


THE   SPIRITUAL   BODY.  211 

through  every  change ;  that  cannot  be  base  matter 
as  we  know  it,  and  that  by  virtue  of  its  persist- 
ence, enables  each  of  us  to  affirm  our  identity. 
Take  away  this  something  ;  leave  nothing  but  the 
base  matter  of  the  physical  body,  and  no  man 
could  affirm  himself,  after  a  period,  to  be  the 
same  individual  that  he  once  was. 

But  I  desire  to  call  your  attention  to  another 
fact,  and  to  another  proof  for  the  existence  of 
the  spiritual  body.  It  may  be  called  the  physio- 
logical. A  few  moments  ago  I  called  your  atten- 
tion to  it  in  an  incidental  way.  Among  those 
who  have  the  best  right  to  speak,  it  is  stoutly 
held  that  mind  must  also  have  its  organ  ;  that 
without  a  substance  of  some  kind,  upon  which 
mental  and  sensuous  impressions  are  made,  con- 
scious thought  could  not  be.  It  is  likewise  a  set- 
tled question  in  mental  physiology,  that  memory 
implies  and  demands  such  a  substance.  If  you 
journey  yonder  on  the  shores  of  the  Nile,  you  will 
find  monuments  covered  with  inscriptions.  The 
deeds  of  heroes  and  the  annals  of  empires  long 
since  passed  away,  are  traced  there  upon  the 
imperishable  rocks,  and  men  to-day,  studying  out 
the    meaning    of   those    strange    characters,    read 


2  12  THE  SPIRITUAL   BODY. 

the  history  of  nations  that  are  no  more.  Those 
rocks  bearing  those  inscriptions  connect  the  pres- 
ent with  the  past,  and  stand  there  as  history's 
organ  of  memory.  Destroy  these  rocks,  and 
with  them  perishes  the  knowledge  traced  upon 
them.  Just  so  it  is  in  the  case  of  memory. 
Without  some  substance  back  of  the  mind  upon 
which  impressions  may  be  traced  and  knowledge 
recorded,  memory  could  not  be  ;  for  it  is  alone  as 
the  mind  reads  these  impressions,  long  since  made 
on  this  enduring  substance,  that  it  becomes  pos- 
sible to  recall  past  events,  or  to  retain  knowledge 
that  has  once  been  ours.  Now  observe  that  it  is 
in  this  way  modern  physiological  science  feels 
itself  compelled  to  account  for  the  fact  of  mem- 
ory, and  in  this  way  does  it  explain  our  power  to 
recall  the  past  and  to  retain  knowledge  of  which 
we  have  once  come  into  possession. 

You  see,  then,  that  memory  implies  two  things. 
First  :  It  implies  an  organ  upon  which  impres- 
sions are  made.  Second  :  It  implies  the  conserva- 
tion of  that  organ.  For  wlicn  the  organ  perishes 
it  must  be  clear  that  the  ability  to  recall  perishes 
with  it. 

And    thus    we    have    two    very    important    and 


THE   SPIRITUAL   BODY.  213 

significant  facts  bearing  on  the  question  of  the 
existence  of  the  spiritual  body  in  man.  It  is 
certain  that  this  organ  upon  whicli  memory 
is  dependent,  cannot  be  made  up  of  the  gross 
matter  out  of  which  the  tangible  fabric  of  the 
body  is  built,  for  if  this  were  the  case,  it  would 
not  persist.  It  would  then  be  subject  to  the 
laws  that  govern  the  gross  matter  of  the  body, 
and,  inasmuch  as  this  matter  is  gradually  giving 
way  and  being  replaced  by  other,  it  follows  that, 
after  a  period  of  seven  years,  it  would  be  impos- 
sible for  any  one  to  recall  anything  that  had  taken 
place  prior  to  that  period.  And  yet  we  are  cer- 
tain that  the  reach  of  memory  is  not  thus  circum- 
scribed. Memory  knows  no  time  limit.  The  man 
of  seventy  years  recalls  the  scenes  and  the  inci- 
dents of  his  youth  as  readily  and  as  accurately  as 
those  of  yesterday.  It  must,  therefore,  be  that  the 
substance  or  organ  belonging  to  memory  has  been 
conserved.  Amid  the  repeated  changes  of  every 
material  particle  it  must  have  held  its  place.  It 
cannot,  therefore,  be  of  a  nature  the  same  as  the 
gross  matter  of  the  body.  It  cannot  be  matter 
as  we  know  matter,  but  must  be  something  spirit- 
ual and  unchansreable  in  its  character. 


2  14  THE   SPIRITUAL    BODY. 

And  thus,  when  man  has  come  to  look  closely 
into  the  facts  of  his  own  consciousness,  he  has 
come  to  recognize  the  necessity  of  a  spiritual 
substance  or  body,  in  order  that  he  may  interpret 
the  facts  of  consciousness  as  they  exist.  He  has 
found  himself  in  the  possession  of  a  conscious- 
ness of  personal  identity.  He  has  found  himself 
in  possession  of  memory,  and,  driven  to  account 
for  these  facts,  he  has  found  the  existence  of  a 
spiritual  body  as  necessary  to  their  solution. 

But  we  come  now  to  our  second  inquiry  : 
What  is  the  character  and  nature  of  this  spiritual 
body  ? 

It  is  very  manifest  that  such  a  body  is  now 
resident  in  man.  But  its  character  is  not  so 
easily  determined  as  is  the  fact  of  its  existence. 
And  yet  we  shall  not  look  in  vain  even  into  the 
question  as  to  its  character.  But  you  must  not 
be  surprised  if  it  is  said  that  this  body  of  which 
we  have  been  speaking  is  material  in  its  nature. 
You  know  that  Herman  Ulrici,  who  has  looked 
into  our  question  more  deeply  than  any  other  of 
whom  I  have  knowledge,  spoke  of  the  spiritual 
body  as  ''a  perfect  fluid."  He  conceives  it  "as 
similar  to  the  ether,  only  not  like  the  latter  con- 


THE  SPIRITUAL   BODY.  215 

sisting'  of  atoms,  but  absolutely  continuous,  and 
that  this  fluid  extends  out  from  a  given  center, 
permeating  the  whole  atomic  structure  of  the 
body,  operating  instinctively  and  in  cooperation 
with  the  vital  force." 

I  am  aware  that  in  the  minds  of  many  there 
exists  an  almost  instinctive  aversion  to  every 
attempt  at  the  materialization  of  that  which  we 
have  always  conceived  as  the  immaterial  within 
us.  And  yet  it  must  be  admitted  that  much  of 
our  prejudice  arises  out  of  the  fact  that  we  have 
studied  matter  altogether  in  its  lower  and  baser 
forms.  When  the  term  matter  is  used,  at  once 
there  come  before  the  mind  conceptions  based 
upon  our  knowledge  of  matter  in  its  lower  forms. 
We  think  of  weight,  of  inertia,  and  the  like,  as 
the  essential  properties  of  matter  ;  and  imagine 
that  the  only  forms  in  which  matter  can  exist  are 
the  forms  which  it  assumes  in  earth  and  water 
and  plant,  and  the  various  objects  which  make  up 
the  visible  and  tangible  world. 

We  say  that  weight  is  an  essential  property  of 
matter,  and  have  long  been  repeating  over  and 
over  to  ourselves  that  "  no  two  substances  can 
occupy  the  same  space  at   the   same   time."     Of 


2i6  THE  SPIRITUAL   BODY. 

course,  if  our  conceptions  of  matter  are  such  as 
these,  if  our  notions  of  it  have  all  been  formed 
by  our  study  of  matter  in  but  two  or  three  of  its 
forms,  we  shall  have  very  grave  objections  to  any 
theory  in  which  the  spiritual  body  is  conceived  of 
as  material  in  its  character.  And  yet  it  is  very 
clear,  in  the  light  of  recent  investigation,  that  our 
ideas  of  matter  must  now  be  very  greatly  modi- 
fied, and  other  conceptions  that  we  have  had, 
entirely  given  up.  Indeed,  by  those  who  have 
studied  most  into  its  nature,  it  is  now  admitted 
that  of  the  essence,  character  and  possibilities  of 
matter,  we  perhaps  know  less  than  we  do  of  any 
other  one  thing.  But  this  much  is  certain.  The 
better  we  come  to  know  it  in  its  higher  forms,  the 
more  evident  is  its  independence  of  those  laws 
and  conditions  which  hitherto  were  supposed  to 
control  matter  universally.  In  the  language  of 
Professor  Crookes,  matter,  as  we  pass  from  the 
lower  to  the  higher  forms,  more  and  more  loses 
its  ordinary  properties  and  more  and  more  ''as- 
sumes the  character  of  radiant  energy." 

Let  me  read  here  a  few  sentences  from  "  The 
Life  and  Letters  of  Faraday,"  concerning  the 
nature   of    matter   in   its   higher  forms.      "■  If    we 


THE  SPIRITUAL   BODY.  217 

conceive,"  says  Faraday,  "  a  change  as  far  beyond 
vaporization  as  that  is  above  fluidity,  and  then 
take  into  account  also  the  proportional  increased 
extent  of  alteration  as  the  changes  rise,  we  shall, 
perhaps,  if  we  can  form  any  conception  at  all,  not 
fall  far  short  of  radiant  matter ;  and,  as  in  the  last 
conversion  many  qualities  were  lost,  so  here,  also, 
many  more  would  disappear." 

"  As  we  ascend  from  the  solid  to  the  fluid  and 
gaseous  states,  physical  properties  diminish  in 
number  and  variety,  each  state  losing  some  of  the 
properties  which  belong  to  the  preceding  state. 
When  solids  are  converted  into  fluids,  all  the 
varieties  of  hardness  and  softness  are  necessarily 
lost.  Crystalline  and  other  shapes  are  destroyed. 
Opacity  and  color  frequently  give  way  to  a  color- 
less transparency,  and  a  general  mobility  of  par- 
ticles is  conferred.  Passing  onward  to  the  gas- 
eous state,  still  more  of  the  evident  characters 
of  bodies  are  annihilated.  The  immense  differ- 
ences in  their  weight  almost  disappear.  The  re- 
mains of  difference  in  color  are  lost.  Transpa- 
rency becomes  universal,  and  they  are  all  elastic. 
They  now  form  but  one  set  of  substances,  and 
the  varieties  of  density,  hardness,  opacity,  color, 


2i8  THE  SPIRITUAL    BODY. 

elasticity  and  form,  which  render  the  number  of 
soUds  and  fluids  ahiiost  infinite,  are  now  supplied 
by  a  few  slight  variations  in  weight,  and  some 
unimportant  shades  of  color." 

You  see,  then,  that  as  we  ascend  from  the 
baser  to  the  higher  forms  of  matter,  there  is  a 
gradual  resignation  of  those  properties  which  we 
commonly  regard  as  belonging  to  matter.  Weight 
is,  at  least  in  a  great  measure,  lost.  The  prop- 
erty of  impenetrability  is  lost,  and  it  is  even  now 
admitted  that  matter  in  its  higher  forms  may 
occupy  the  same  space  with  matter  in  its  lower. 
Do  you  say  that  that  cannot  be }  Open  Professor 
Tait's  recent  book  on  '*  Properties  of  Matter," 
and  bear  in  mind  that  at  present  no  one  has  a 
better  right  to  speak  of  matter,  its  properties  and 
possibilities,  than  he.  The  statement  to  which  I 
specially  call  your  attention  is  that  in  which  he 
reviews  the  atomic  theory  as  propounded  by 
Boscovich.  In  his  statement  of  the  theory, 
Boscovich  said  that,  on  account  of  a  peculiar  law, 
no  two  atoms  could  be  conceived  as  occupying  the 
same  space  at  the  same  time.  To  this  last  state- 
ment, Professor  Tait  objects  in  these  words  : 
*'  But   this   seems  an   unwarranted  concession   to 


THE  SPIRITUAL    BODY.  219 

the  vulgar  opinion  tliat  two  bodies  cannot  co-exist 
in  the  same  place.  This  opinion  is  decluced  from 
our  experience  of  the  behavior  of  bodies  of  sen- 
sible size,  but  we  have  no  experimental  evidence 
that  two  atoms  cannot  coincide."  Now  I  want 
you  to  fix  your  attention  on  that  last  statement, 
because  it  will  be  of  immense  importance  by  and 
by  when  we  come  to  study  the  spiritual  body  of 
Christ  as  it  was  revealed  prior  to  his  ascension. 
There  is  also  a  very  significant  passage  in  one  of 
the  lectures  of  the  deservedly  famous  Dr.  Thomas 
Young,  to  which  I  must  also  call  your  attention 
before  we  pass  on.  He  is  speaking  of  the  differ- 
ent orders  of  being,  and,  in  this  connection,  he 
says:  ''And  of  these  different  orders  of  beings, 
the  more  refined  and  immaterial  appear  to  per- 
vade freely  the  grosser.  We  know  not  but  that 
thousands  of  spiritual  worlds  may  exist  unseen 
forever  by  human  eyes.  Nor  have  w^e  any  reason 
to  suppose  that  even  the  presence  of  matter  in  any 
given  spot,  necessarily  excludes  these  existences 
from  it." 

And  thus  we  come  to  the  conclusion,  looking  at 
the  question  purely  from  its  scientific  side,  that 
the  spiritual  body  may  be  material  in  its  nature. 


220  THE  SPIRITUAL   BODY. 

If  matter  in  its  higlier  forms  may  freely  permeate 
matter  in  its  lower,  then  is  there  no  intrinsic  im- 
probability that  the  substance  of  the  spiritual  body 
may  be  material  though  it  occupies  space  seem- 
ingly occupied  by  the  grosser  matter  of  which  the 
physical  body  is  made  up.  But  that  the  matter  of 
the  spiritual  body  and  that  of  the  physical  is  the 
same  in  state  cannot  for  a  moment  be  admitted. 
Something  of  the  laws  that  govern  matter  in  its 
ordinary  state  we  know.  These,  if  governing  the 
higher  forms  of  matter,  would  preclude  it  from 
entering  into  the  constitution  of  the  spiritual  body. 
But  we  are  certain  that  matter  in  its  higher  forms 
is  not  under  the  dominion  of  those  laws  that  govern 
it  in  its  lower,  nor  does  matter  in  its  higher  forms 
behave  at  all  as  it  does  in  its  lower.  The  sub- 
stance, therefore,  of  the  spiritual  body,  while  doubt- 
less material  in  its  character,  partakes  also  of  the 
character  of  spiritual  being  by  virtue  of  which  it 
is  very  properly  called  "  spiritual  body." 

But  I  ask  you  now  to  turn  from  the  field  of  what 
may  be  called  the  merely  conjectural,  to  that  of  the 
more  positive  knowledge  of  the  spiritual  body.  I 
dare  not  say  that  only  once,  but  I  may  positively 
affirm  that  once  at  least  in  history,  a  spiritual  body 


THE  SPIRITUAL   BODY.  221 

was  seen  here  on  the  earth.  I  speak  of  the  resur- 
rected body  of  Jesus.  Nor  do  I  offer  an  apology 
for  making  reference  to  the  resurrected  body  of 
Jesus,  or  for  asking  you  to  a  scrutiny  of  that  body 
as  it  appeared  during  the  forty  days  intervening 
between  his  resurrection  and  his  ascension.  The 
time  has  passed  when  an  apology  was  demanded 
for  making  reference  to  the  great  facts  of  the  res- 
urrection of  Jesus  in  a  scientific  discussion.  You 
know  that  De  Wette  was  the  leader  of  the  acutest 
school  of  German  rationalism  in  his  day.  So  thor- 
oughly did  he  set  himself  against  the  acceptance 
as  truth  of  anything  the  verity  of  which  could  not 
be  clearly  established  by  the  logical  method,  that 
he  was  called  "the  universal  doubter."  And  yet 
it  is  De  Wette  who  says  that  "  the  fact  of  the 
resurrection,  although  a  darkness  which  cannot  be 
dispelled  rests  on  the  way  and  manner  of  it,  cannot 
itself  be  called  in  doubt."  The  fact,  therefore,  of 
the  resurrection  of  Jesus  stands  side  by  side  with 
the  other  well-accredited  facts  of  history ;  and  ac- 
cepting it  as  such  we  have  a  perfect  right  to  get 
what  licfht  we  can  from  it  even  in  a  scientific  dis- 
cussion.  But  look  at  those  facts  for  a  moment. 
On  the  morning  of  the  third  day  the  sepulchre 


222  THE   SPIRITUAL    BODY. 

of  Joseph  of  Arimatbea  is  found  empty.  No  man 
had  seen  Jesus  go  forth.  No  one  knew  what  had 
become  of  him.  Some  time  afterward  on  the  way 
to  Emmaus  two  disciples  meet  a  stranger.  For 
a  tim.e  he  journeys  by  their  side,  but  they  know 
not  who  he  is.  He  afterward  sits  down  with  them 
to  meat,  and  then  for  the  first  time,  is  the  mys- 
tery dispelled,  and  in  the  person  of  the  stranger 
the  two  disciples  behold  the  resurrected  Jesus. 

Go  back,  now,  to  Jerusalem.  The  enemies  of 
the  disciples  are  vigilant.  Rumors  are  afloat  that 
the  disciples  are  plotting  insurrection,  and  every 
secret  meeting  is  watched  with  suspicion.  But 
there,  in  a  little  room  with  doors  carefully  locked 
to  shut  out  any  chance  intruder,  are  assembled  ten 
of  the  disciples.  Every  avenue  of  entrance  or  of 
exit  is  sealed  and  the  disciples  are  congratulating 
themselves  on  their  security.  Suddenly  Jesus 
stands  in  the  midst  of  them  ;  the  closed  doors  offer 
no  barrier  to  his  incoming.  There  he  stands  be- 
fore the  amazed  disciples,  recognized  by  all  as  their 
risen  Lord.  The  account  of  what  transpired  is 
very  interesting  and  significant.  Naturally  the  ten 
arc  affrighted.  The  sudden  appearance  of  Christ 
in  his  corporeal  body,  the  recollection  that  in  order 


THE   SPIRITUAL   BODY.  223 

to  preclude  the  entrance  of  any  one  they  had 
closed  and  sealed  the  doors,  but  contributed  to 
their  fright  in  finding  themselves  thus  confronted 
by  a  visible  form.  At  first  they  thought  a  spirit 
was  standing  before  them.  Now  notice  the  words 
of  Christ :  "■  Why  are  ye  troubled,  and  why  do 
doubts  arise  in  your  minds  ?  See  my  hands  and 
my  feet,  that  it  is  I.  Handle  me  and  see,  for  a 
spirit  hath  not  flesh  and  bones  as  ye  see  me  have." 
Then  he  shows  them  his  hands  and  his  side  ;  and, 
as  though  further  to  assure  them  of  his  identity, 
he  ate  a  piece  of  broiled  fish  in  their  presence. 
Now  I  want  you  to  notice  four  things  : 

The  body  that  appeared  to  the  disciples  in  that 
closed  room  was  the  same  body  that  was  taken 
down  from  the  cross  and  entombed  in  the  sepulchre 
of  Joseph  of  Arimathea.  You  have  the  proof  for 
that  in  the  fact  that  as  such  it  was  recognized  by 
the  ten  disciples  ;  that  body  was  no  longer  base 
matter,  as  we  know  it.  Had  it  been  such  it  could 
not  have  passed  through  the  closed  doors  behind 
which  the  disciples  had  shut  themselves ;  that 
body  was  not  spirit,  was  not  a  mere  apparition,  but 
was  substance.  ''Handle  me  and  see,  for  a  spirit 
hath  not    flesh  and    bones   as   ye    see  me  have." 


224  THE  SPIRITUAL   BODY. 

Though  matter,  the  passage  of  Christ's  body  through 
closed  doors  can  find  its  explanation  alone  in  the 
fact  of  its  being  matter  in  its  higher  form,  and 
brought  into  this  form,  out  of  the  lower,  by  virtue 
of  its  contact  with  the  spiritual. 

Do  you  say  that  this  passage  through  closed 
doors  was  miraculous,  and  that  for  this  reason  it 
can  teach  us  nothing  in  regard  to  the  nature  of 
the  spiritual  body  ?  My  friends,  that  depends 
upon  what  you  mean  by  the  term  miraculous.  If, 
with  Archbishop  Trench,  you  hold  that  the  true 
miracle  is  not  the  infraction  of  a  law,  but  the  neutral- 
izing of  a  lower  law  for  a  time  by  a  higher  ;  if  with 
you  ''  the  true  miracle  is  but  a  higher  and  a  purer 
nature,  coming  down  out  of  a  world  of  untroubled 
harmonies  into  this  world  of  ours,  for  the  purpose 
of  bringing  this  back  again  into  harmony  with  the 
higher  ;  if  in  the  miracle  this  world  of  ours  is  but 
drawn  into  a  higher  order  of  things,  and  the  laws 
producing  it  are  but  laws  of  a  mightier  range  and 
a  higher  perfection,  though  not  contrary  to  natural 
laws,"  then  was  the  passage  of  the  body  of  Jesus 
through  closed  doors  a  miracle.  In  that  act  the 
lower  laws  governing  base  matter  were  licld  in  sus- 
pension by  the  higher  laws  that  hold  in  the  realm 


THE  SPIRITUAL   BODY.  225 

of  the  spiritual.  But  we  do  not  for  a  moment 
admit  that  Jesus  made  use  of  any  other  power  than 
that  which  belongs  intrinsically  to  the  spiritual 
body  in  order  to  pass  through  the  closed  doors. 
That  act  was  an  exhibition  of  the  possibilities  be- 
longing to  the  spiritual  body  as  being  a  higher 
order  of  existence.  That  power  belongs  to  sub- 
stance in  its  higher  forms. 

Turn  back  now  and  read  again  what  Faraday 
said  in  relation  to  matter  in  its  higher  forms,  and 
as  you  read  it  let  me  ask  you  also  to  bear  in  mind 
that  it  is  now  admitted  that  matter  in  its  higher 
forms  may  occupy  the  same  space  with  matter  in 
its  lower,  hence  may  penetrate  and  pass  through  it. 
Here  are  Faraday's  words :  "  The  person  who 
admits  the  radiant  form  of  matter,  will  show  you 
a  gradual  resignation  of  properties  in  the  matter 
we  can  appreciate  as  the  matter  ascends  in  the 
scale  of  forms."  Take,  too,  in  this  connection,  the 
statement  of  Dr.  Thomas  Young  :  "  And  of  these 
different  orders  of  being  the  more  spiritual  and 
immaterial  appear  to  pervade  freely  the  grosser. 
Nor  have  we  any  reason  to  suppose  that 
even  the  presence  of  matter  in  any  given  spot  nec- 
essarily excludes  these  existences  from  it." 


2  26  THE  SPIRITUAL   BODY. 

Well,  now,  with  these  higher  conceptions  of  mat- 
ter and  its  possibilities,  as  taught  by  the  acutest 
of  scientific  thinkers,  does  it  seem  to  you  to  be  an 
impossibility  that  the  resurrected  body  of  Jesus 
should  be  able  to  pass  through  closed  doors,  or 
that,  though  matter,  it  should  be  able  to  pass 
through  matter  ?  And,  in  the  light  of  these  facts, 
does  it  not  rather  seem  that  that  act  belonged  to 
the  category  of  possibilities  belonging  to  the  spirit- 
ual body,  rather  than  that  it  was  miraculous  as 
some  count  the  miraculous  ?  My  friends,  that  the 
resurrected  and  spiritual  body  of  Jesus  partook  of 
the  nature  of  the  material  cannot  be  held  in  doubt 
by  one  who  carefully  reads  the  narrative  of  his 
appearance.  Those  words  forever  stand  against 
such  a  conclusion  :  "  Handle  me  and  see,  for  a 
spirit  hath  not  flesh  and  bones  as  ye  see  me  have." 
True,  a  spirit  hath  not  flesh  and  bones,  but  a  spirit- 
ual  body  has.  Partaking  both  of  the  nature  of 
matter  and  of  spirit,  though  material  on  the  one 
side  it  IS  not  limited  as  is  ordinary  matter.  The 
qualities  of  spirit  have  been  communicated  to  it, 
transfiguring  and  glorifying  it,  so  that  through 
doors  of  brass  or  walls  of  adamant  it  can  pass  as 
readily  as  though  these  spaces  were  unoccupied. 


THE  SPIRITUAL   BODY.  227 

Light  as  the  desire  that  prompts,  it  can  also  mount 
upward,  transport  itself  from  place  to  place  —  the 
willing  instrument  of  the  spirit  of  which  it  is  the 
organ. 

And  thus  in  our  study  of  the  nature  of  the  spir- 
itual body,  as  revealed  in  the  manifestations  of 
Him  whose  resurrection  and  ascension  cannot  be 
called  in  question,  we  get  some  conception  of  its 
real  character  and  possibilities.  But,  you  say, 
''There  is  a  wide  difference  between  the  resur- 
rected body  of  Jesus  and  the  spiritual  body  resi- 
dent in  man.  No  part  of  that  body  was  lost. 
Identically  the  same  body,  part  for  part  and  parti- 
cle for  particle,  was  raised,  for  no  part  of  it  saw 
corruption." 

You  ask,  **  Do  you  mean,  then,  to  say  that  the  body 
of  Jesus  in  the  very  last  moment  preceding  his  death 
was  a  spiritual  body,  seeing  that  it  was  this  body 
that  was  raised  and  that  afterward  ascended } " 
That  is  a  very  pertinent  and  yet  a  very  difficult 
question.  But  if  we  are  willing  to  submit  our- 
selves to  the  lead  of  the  profoundest  and  most 
far-sighted  theologians,  we  shall  find  a  way  out  of 
the  darkness.  Among  the  acutest  of  theological 
thinkers  this  is  the  view  taken  :  that  the  body  of 


2  28  THE  SPIRITUAL   BODY. 

Jesr.s  during  bis  earthly  ministry  was  like  our 
own,  corruptible,  subject  to  the  same  wants,  sus- 
ceptible to  the  same  conditions,  and  mortal  ;  but 
that  during  his  life  of  unsullied  purity  and  contact 
with  God,  a  gradual  change  went  on,  so  that  even 
that  body  once  really  material,  became  more  and 
more  spiritual  in  its  character.  By  the  leavening 
and  transforming  power  of  the  indwelling  spirit, 
the  baser  material  was  gradually  eliminated,  so 
that  the  processes  of  decay  which  in  your  case 
and  mine  must  go  on  in  the  dissolution  of  the 
grave,  for  the  elimination  of  the  grosser  material 
of  our  bodies,  went  on  in  the  case  of  Jesus  during 
life. 

By  virtue  of  unhindered  contact  with  the  spirit- 
ual, the  corruptible  gradually  put  on  incorruption, 
the  mortal  gradually  put  on  immortality,  and,  the 
material  gradually  giving  place,  was  at  length 
entirely  merged  into  the  spiritual  body.  At  the 
moment  of  the  ascension  this  transformation  was 
completed. 

Let  me  read  here  a  few  sentences  that  I  have 
taken  from  the  **  Dogmatics  of  the  great  Danish 
theologian,  Dr.  Martensen  "  :  — 

"  All  the  four  gospel  accounts   of  the  resurrcc- 


THE  SPTRrrUAL    BODY.  229 

tion,  seem  to  introduce  two  contrasted  representa- 
tions concerning  the  nature  of  the  resurrected 
body  of  our  Lord.  The  risen  one  seems  now  to 
live  a  natural  human  life,  in  a  body  such  as  he  had 
before  his  death.  He  has  flesh  and  bones,  he  cats 
and  drinks  ;  again,  on  the  contrary,  he  seems  to 
have  a  body  of  a  spiritual,  transcendental  kind, 
which  is  independent  of  the  limitations  of  time 
and  space.  He  enters  through  closed  doors,  he 
stands  suddenly  in  the  midst  of  his  disciples,  and 
as  suddenly  becomes  invisible  to  them.  This  con- 
tradiction which  occurs  in  the  appearance  of  the 
risen  one  during  the  forty  days,  may  be  explained 
upon  the  supposition  that  during  this  interval  his 
body  was  in  a  state  of  transition  and  of  change, 
upon  the  boundaries  of  both  worlds,  and  possessed 
the  impress  and  character  of  both  of  these  worlds. 
Not  until  the  moment  of  the  ascension  can  we 
suppose  his  body  was  fully  glorified  and  free  from 
all  earthly  limitations  and  wants,  like  the  spiritual 
body  of  which  Paul  speaks." 

You  see,  then,  that  while  in  the  estimation  of 
this  author  there  went  on  a  gradual  change  of 
transformation  of  the  material  into  the  spiritual, 
he  confines  the  period  of  transition  more  particu- 


230  THE  SPIRITUAL   BODY. 

larly  to  the  forty  clays  intervening  between  the 
resurrection  and  the  ascension,  and  holds  that 
such  a  transformation  was  not  completed  or  the 
spiritual  body  perfectly  revealed  until  the  moment 
of  the  ascension.  Not  so,  however,  with  the  early 
church.  The  view  then  prevailed  that  immediately 
after  the  resurrection  his  body  was  the  spiritual 
body  of  which  Paul  speaks,  and  it  was  very  prop- 
erly maintained  that  the  sudden  appearances  and 
disappearances  of  the  risen  Saviour  could  not  be 
explained  if  after  his  resurrection  his  body  had 
not  been  spiritual. 

But  that  this  process  of  transformation,  this 
gradual  leavening  of  the  material  by  the  spiritual, 
went  on  during  the  life  of  Jesus  prior  to  his  cruci- 
fixion, cannot  for  a  moment  be  held  in  question. 
No  less  an  accurate  thinker  than  Julius  Muller, 
face  to  face  with  the  facts  of  the  transfiguration, 
admits  that  these  facts  cannot  be  explained  except 
on  the  supposition  that  the  change  was  already 
going  on.  Here  are  his  own  words:  "Though 
the  resurrection  must  be  regarded  as  the  turning 
point,  when  the  glorifying  and  spiritualizing  pro- 
cess in  Christ's  body  began  to  approach  its  con- 
summation in  the  ascension,  we  cannot  limit  the 


THE   SPIRITUAL    BODY.  231 

process  within  those  two  events.  It  may  have 
been  going  on  gradually  even  before  his  death, 
without  in  the  least  deteriorating  from  the  reality 
of  his  earthly  body.  There  is  one  event  indicat- 
ing this  in  the  Gospel  history  —  I  mean  the 
transfiguration." 

Well,  now,  let  us  put  these  facts  together,  in 
order  that  we  may  see  what  we  have. 

We  have  here  in  the  case  of  Jesus  of  Nazareth, 
a  material  body.  We  have  this  body,  under  full 
contact  with  the  resident  spirit,  gradually  losing 
its  baser  material  until  the  stupendous  scenes  of 
the  transfiguration,  the  various  appearances  and 
disappearances,  the  passage  through  closed  doors, 
and  finally  the  ascension  become  possible.  And 
yet,  that  that  body,  so  far  as  it  served  as  an  organ, 
was  immaterial,  cannot  for  a  moment  be  admitted ; 
for  to  admit  that  would  make  the  words  of  Jesus, 
"  Handle  me  and  see,"  and  those  to  doubting 
Thomas,  "  Reach  hither  thy  finger  and  behold  my 
hands,  and  reach  hither  thy  hand  and  thrust  it 
into  my  side,"  of  no  meaning. 

And  now  that  such  shall  be  the  character  of  our 
spiritual  bodies  is  a  very  necessary  conclusion. 
Not  indeed  of   the   baser  matter  of   the    present 


232  THE  SPIRITUAL   BODY. 

shall  our  future  bodies  be,  but  of  the  higher.  Of 
the  baser  we  shall  be  rid  in  the  dissolution  of  the 
grave,  but  the  higher  we  shall  retain.  What  a 
life  of  complete  fellowship  with  and  indwelling  of 
God  did  for  the  body  of  Jesus,  the  grave  must  do 
for  us.  But  the  body  that  shall  be  is  now.  The 
higher  of  the  present  shall  be  the  substance  of 
the  future  body.  It  is  in  the  light  of  such  a  con- 
ception that  the  words  of  Paul  in  relation  to  the 
spiritual  body  can  be  interpreted.  Speaking  of 
the  present  body  he  says,  *'  It  is  sown  a  natural 
body,  it  is  raised  a  spiritual  body."  Plainly,  in  his 
conception,  the  body  that  now  is  is  the  body  that 
shall  be.  "There  is"  (not  there  shall  be)  "a  spir- 
itual body.  For  we  know  that  if  our  earthly  house 
of  this  tabernacle  were  dissolved,  we  have  a  build- 
ing of  God,  a  house  not  made  with  hands,  eternal 
in  the  heavens." 

As  Christ  arose  from  the  dead  with  a  glorified 
body,  the  first-born  among  many  brethren,  so 
shall  man,  disrobed  of  the  gross  matter  that  now 
inswathes  his  true  body  here,  come  forth  a  spirit- 
ual body. 

And  right  along  here  there  lies  a  truth  of 
immense  ethical  significance.     We  are  told  that, 


THE  SPIRITUAL   BODY.  233 

in  their  unscientific  way,  the  ancients,  accounting 
for  the  brilliancy  of  the  diamond,  said  that  it  was 
caused  by  the  sunbeams  that  the  diamond  had 
absorbed.  For  thousands  of  years  lying  under 
the  fiery  gleam  of  the  sun,  there  was  imparted  to 
these  jewels  a  radiance  which,  retained  somehow 
in  their  substance,  accounted  for  their  present 
brightness.  And  while  in  the  case  of  the  diamond 
the  ancients  were  in  error,  they  came  very  near  a 
truth  that  has  since  become  an  established  fact  in 
science.  For  when  Prof.  Becquerel  discovered 
the  phosphorescent  qualities  of  calcium  sulphide 
and  then  attempted  to  account  for  its  phospho- 
rescence, it  was  found  that  certain  substances 
have  power  of  assimilating  properties  belong- 
ing to  certain  other  substances,  and  by  virtue 
of  this  power  they  are  able  to  manifest  certain 
phenomena  not  naturally  belonging  to  themselves. 
Steel  becomes  magnetized  in  contact  with  the 
magnet  and  takes  to  itself  properties  not  belong- 
ing to  it  before.  Calcium  sulphide,  after  exposure 
to  the  sun,  assumes  to  itself  a  property  that  before 
did  not  belong  to  it  and  becomes  lummous  in  the 
darkness. 

And  is  it  therefore  an  unwarranted  assumption. 


234  THE  SPIRITUAL   BODY. 

and  without  its  analogy  in  nature,  when  we  say- 
that  the  same  thing  may  go  on  in  the  case  of  the 
base  matter  now  entering  into  the  constitution  of 
our  bodies  ?  Expose  the  matter  within  our  bodies 
to  free  contact  with  Him  who  is  spirit,  and  the 
result  will  be  the  assimilation  of  spiritual  qualities 
and  the  elimination  of  the  baser  material.  What 
went  on  during  the  life  of  Christ  in  the  gradual 
elimination  of  the  baser  material  and  in  the  per- 
fection of  the  spiritual  body,  within  certain  limits 
has  gone  on  in  man,  and  may  go  on  in  man  still. 

In  the  name  of  science  it  may  be  affirmed  that 
what  is  taken  from  the  flesh  is  given  to  the  spirit, 
and  what  is  taken  from  the  spirit  is  given  to  the 
grosser  flesh.  It  is  certain  that  the  consciousness 
of  humanity,  however  it  may  be  explained,  bears 
testimony  to  that  fact. 

The  judgment  of  mankind,  were  it  uttered, 
would  bear  testimony  that  between  the  matter  of 
the  body  of  a  Nero  and  that  of  an  Elijah,  there  is 
the  vastest  difference  in  character.  In  the  one, 
the  higher  and  more  spiritual  assumed  the  charac- 
ter of  baser  matter.  In  the  other,  the  baser 
material  had  gradually  given  place  to  the  higher 
and  the  more  spiritual. 


THE   SPIRITUAL    BODY.  235 

There  is  a  very  significant  passage  in  Arch- 
bishop Trench's  book  on  miracles,  that  I  must 
quote  in  this  connection.  You  will  find  it  at  the 
close  of  the  chapter  entitled,  '*  The  Walking  on  the 
Sea."  This  is  the  passage  :  "  In  regard  to  this 
very  law  of  gravitation,  a  feeble  and  for  the  most 
part  unconsciously  possessed  remnant  of  his  power 
survives  to  man,  in  the  well-attested  fact  that  his 
body  is  lighter  when  he  is  awake  than  sleeping." 
And  this  is  the  way  he  accounts  for  it  :  *'  From 
this  we  conclude  that  the  human  consciousness  as 
an  inner  center  works  as  an  opposing  force  to  the 
attraction  of  the  earth  and  the  centripetal  force  of 
gravity,  however  unable  now  to  overcome  it." 

To  the  recent  statements  and  their  proofs  that 
in  certain  states  of  moral  trance  the  body  is 
actually  lighter  than  in  those  states  we  call  normal, 
I  need  hardly  call  your  attention.  That  field  of 
science  has  not  yet  been  sufficiently  explored. 
And  yet  no  less  an  authority  than  Prof.  Crookes, 
gives  it  as  his  opinion  that  in  certain  states  of 
moral  trance  the  body  is  actually  lighter  than  at 
other  periods,  and  if  this  be  the  case  he  says  fur- 
ther, ''its  causes  must  be  natural."  1  do  not  share 
in  the  sneer  in  which  some  have  indulged  at  this 


236  THE  SPIRITUAL   BODY. 

Statement  of  Mr.  Crookcs,  that,  "  if  the  body  in 
states  of  moral  trance  is  hghter,  the  causes  must 
be  natural."  For,  my  friends,  we  are  coming  to 
recognize  the  truth  that  there  are  no  arbitrary 
lines  separating  the  temporal  from  the  eternal,  the 
seen  from  the  unseen,  or  the  natural  from  the  spirit- 
ual. We  are  coming  to  recognize  that  the  one 
passes  over  into  the  other  by  natural,  orderly  laws. 
For  one,  I  cannot  but  believe  that,  when  matter 
in  its  higher  states  is  better  known,  and  when  the 
effects  on  that  matter  in  contact  with  the  spiritual 
are  better  understood,  we  shall  find  it  to  be  en- 
dowed with  possibilities  of  which  we  do  not  even 
dream.  Certain  it  is  that  even  before  the  ascen- 
sion, and  even  before  the  crucifixion,  the  body  of 
Jesus  manifested  powers  clearly  belonging  to  the 
spiritual  body.  He  disappeared ;  he  walked  on  the 
sea  ;  and  as  at  Capernaum,  so  elsewhere  the  won- 
der of  the  disciples  was  expressed  in  the  question, 
"  Rabbi,  when  camest  thou  hither  t  "  And  on  Iler- 
mon,  in  the  hush  and  shadow  of  the  midnight,  he 
gave  to  the  disciples  an  exhibition  .of  his  higher 
nature,  in  order  to  fortify  their  faith  against  the 
hour  of  his  crucifixion. 

It  is  true  tliat  by  some  all  this  may  be  set  over 


THE  SPIRITUAL    BODY.  237 

to  the  realm  of  the  visionary.  It  may  be  said  that 
this  transformation  of  the  material  into  the  spiritual 
in  contact  with  the  spirit  of  God  which  we  have 
affirmed  as  going  on  in  man,  is  but  an  empty 
notion.  It  may  so  be;  but  I  want  you  to  observe 
that,  by  that  judgment,  you  are  left  to  account  for 
the  then  unexplained  fact,  that  by  all  men  and  in 
all  ages  these  notions  have  not  been  regarded  as 
visionary,  but  real.  You  have  then  to  account  for 
the  persistence  of  a  judgment  in  favor  of  which 
there  never  was  nor  can  be  a  single  fact. 

Let  those  who  choose  deny  these  possibilities  to 
the  higher  matter  in  contact  with  the  spiritual  in 
man.  There  are  those  who  will  not  and  cannot. 
And  to  these  there  is  herein  revealed  a  truth,  in 
the  light  of  which  the  translation  of  Enoch  and 
Elijah,  as  well  as  the  ascension  of  Christ,  can  be 
better  understood.  It  can  then  be  understood 
how  that  with  bodies  like  our  own,  and  by  virtue 
of  their  walk  with  God,  they  were  at  length  able 
to  mount  upward  ;  how  that  the  realm  over  which 
the  laws  that  govern  matter  in  its  lower  forms  was 
gradually  overstepped  and  transformed  into  the 
spiritual  body,  they  could  pass  upward  into  the 
unseen. 


238  THE  SPIRITUAL    BODY. 

I  know  that  you  will  pardon  mc,  if,  in  conclud- 
ing, I  ask  you  to  look  hastily  at  a  certain  deduc- 
tion, which,  while  not  belonging  properly  to  the 
discussion,  yet  necessarily  comes  out  of  it.  In  our 
consideration  of  the  spiritual  body  there  has  come 
unsought  an  answer  to  another  question.  I  speak 
of  the  question  of  our  after  recognition. 

William  Cullen  Bryant,  in  a  poem  dedicated  to 
his  departed  wife,  puts  a  question  that  you  and 
I  are  constantly  putting  to  ourselves,  and  to  which 
we  are  ever  seeking  an  answer. 

For  thirty  years  the  wife  of  the  poet  had  been 
the  ministering  angel  of  his  home,  and  for  ten  had 
preceded  him  to  the  other  side  ;  amid  the  loneli- 
ness that  was  his  he  wrote  and  dedicated  to  her 
this  poem :  — 


"How  shall  I  know  thee  in  the  sphere  which  keeps 
The  disembodied  spirits  of  the  dead, 

When  all  of  thee  that  time  could  wither,  sleeps 
And  perishes  among  the  dust  we  tread  ? 

"  For  I  shall  feel  the  sting  of  ceaseless  pain 
If  there  I  meet  thy  gentle  presence  not, 

Nor  hear  the  voice  I  love,  nor  read  again 
In  thy  serenest  eye  the  tender  thought. 


THE    SPIRITUAL    BODY.  239 

"Will  not  thy  own  meek  heart  demaiul  me  there, 
That  heart  whose  fondest  throbs  to  me  were  given  ? 

My  name  on  earth  was  ever  in  thy  prayer, 
And  must  thou  never  utter  it  in  Heaven  ? 

"  Yet,  though  thou  wearest  the  glory  of  the  sky, 
Wilt  thou  not  keep  the  same  beloved  name, 

The  same  fair,  thoughtful  brow  and  gentle  eye, 

Lovelier  in  Heaven's  sweet  climate,  yet  the  same  ? " 

The  answer  to  Bryant's  inquiry  we  have  had. 
In  the  body  that  now  is,  we  find  the  body  that  shall 
be.  Stripped  of  the  defects  and  hinderances  that 
inhere  in  its  baser  matter,  retaining  its  higher 
material  elements,  the  body  that  now  is  shall 
pass  iiiLu  the  unseen. 


x%\% 


^:)S:.^-